]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
update thread list, delete exited threads
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
b90efa5b 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
b90efa5b 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
b90efa5b 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
26278bb8
UD
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
856Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857flags governing input file handling.
858
a712da20
NC
859@kindex -q
860@kindex --emit-relocs
861@cindex retain relocations in final executable
862@item -q
863@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 864Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
865Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867in larger executables.
868
dbab7a7b
NC
869This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
4f471f39
RS
871@kindex --force-dynamic
872@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873@item --force-dynamic
874Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875to VxWorks targets.
876
252b5132
RH
877@cindex partial link
878@cindex relocatable output
879@kindex -r
1049f94e 880@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 881@item -r
1049f94e 882@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 883Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 884turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
885linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 888@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
889If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
62bf86b4
HPN
893When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897with input files in other formats at all.
898
252b5132
RH
899This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901@kindex -R @var{file}
902@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903@cindex symbol-only input
904@item -R @var{filename}
905@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
ff5dcc92 911For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 912followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 913the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
914
915@kindex -s
916@kindex --strip-all
917@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 918@item -s
252b5132
RH
919@itemx --strip-all
920Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922@kindex -S
923@kindex --strip-debug
924@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 925@item -S
252b5132
RH
926@itemx --strip-debug
927Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929@kindex -t
930@kindex --trace
931@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 932@item -t
252b5132 933@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 934Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -T @var{script}
937@kindex --script=@var{script}
938@cindex script files
939@item -T @var{scriptfile}
940@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 942@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 943@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
944output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947options accumulate.
252b5132 948
14be8564
L
949@kindex -dT @var{script}
950@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951@cindex script files
952@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963@samp{gcc}).
964
252b5132
RH
965@kindex -u @var{symbol}
966@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967@cindex undefined symbol
968@item -u @var{symbol}
969@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976@kindex -Ur
977@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 978@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
979For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
980@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 981turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
982@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
983It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
984with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
985be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
986@samp{-r} for the others.
987
577a0623
AM
988@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
989@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
990Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
991@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
992missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
993specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
994multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
995input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
996in a linker script.
a854a4a7 997
252b5132
RH
998@kindex -v
999@kindex -V
1000@kindex --version
1001@cindex version
1002@item -v
1003@itemx --version
1004@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1005Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1006lists the supported emulations.
1007
1008@kindex -x
1009@kindex --discard-all
1010@cindex deleting local symbols
1011@item -x
1012@itemx --discard-all
1013Delete all local symbols.
1014
1015@kindex -X
1016@kindex --discard-locals
1017@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1018@item -X
252b5132 1019@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1020Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1021system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1022or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1023
1024@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1025@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1026@cindex symbol tracing
1027@item -y @var{symbol}
1028@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1029Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1030option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1031to prepend an underscore.
1032
1033This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1034don't know where the reference is coming from.
1035
1036@kindex -Y @var{path}
1037@item -Y @var{path}
1038Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1039for Solaris compatibility.
1040
1041@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1042@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1043The recognized keywords are:
1044@table @samp
1045
1046@item combreloc
1047Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1048lookup caching possible.
1049
1050@item defs
560e09e9 1051Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1052shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1053
6aa29e7b
JJ
1054@item execstack
1055Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1056
b039ef04
L
1057@item global
1058This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1059the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1060of subsequently loaded libraries.
1061
cd6d6c15
NC
1062@item initfirst
1063This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1064It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1065before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1066the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1067the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1068objects.
1069
1070@item interpose
1071Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1072but the primary executable.
1073
5fa222e4
AM
1074@item lazy
1075When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1076dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1077the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1078Lazy binding is the default.
1079
cd6d6c15
NC
1080@item loadfltr
1081Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1082runtime.
1083
1084@item muldefs
1085Allows multiple definitions.
1086
1087@item nocombreloc
1088Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1089
1090@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1091Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1092defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1093
1094@item nodefaultlib
1095Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1096ignore any default library search paths.
1097
1098@item nodelete
1099Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1100
1101@item nodlopen
1102Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1103
1104@item nodump
1105Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1106
6aa29e7b
JJ
1107@item noexecstack
1108Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1109
8dfef1bd
L
1110@item text
1111Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1112
1113@item notext
1114Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1115
1116@item textoff
1117Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1118
6aa29e7b
JJ
1119@item norelro
1120Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1121
cd6d6c15
NC
1122@item now
1123When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1124dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1125when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1126deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1127first called.
1128
1129@item origin
1130Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1131
6aa29e7b
JJ
1132@item relro
1133Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1134
24718e3b
L
1135@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1136Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1137
1138@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1139Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1140
04c3a755
NS
1141@item stack-size=@var{value}
1142Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1143Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1144@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1145
d258b828
IZ
1146@item bndplt
1147Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1148
cd6d6c15
NC
1149@end table
1150
ece2d90e 1151Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1152
1153@kindex -(
1154@cindex groups of archives
1155@item -( @var{archives} -)
1156@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1157The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1158either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1159
1160The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1161references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1162the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1163archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1164object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1165would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1166they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1167resolved.
1168
1169Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1170it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1171more archives.
1172
69da35b5
NC
1173@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1174@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1175@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1176@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1177Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1178recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1179and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1180the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1181behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1182so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1183restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1184
4a43e768
AM
1185@kindex --as-needed
1186@kindex --no-as-needed
1187@item --as-needed
1188@itemx --no-as-needed
1189This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1190on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1191the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1192on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1193needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1194emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1195non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1196the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1197non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1198Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1199the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1200needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1201from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1202
e56f61be
L
1203@kindex --add-needed
1204@kindex --no-add-needed
1205@item --add-needed
1206@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1207These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1208their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1209options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1210and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1211
252b5132
RH
1212@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1213@item -assert @var{keyword}
1214This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1215
1216@kindex -Bdynamic
1217@kindex -dy
1218@kindex -call_shared
1219@item -Bdynamic
1220@itemx -dy
1221@itemx -call_shared
1222Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1223for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1224default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1225for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1226multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1227@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1228
a1ab1d2a
UD
1229@kindex -Bgroup
1230@item -Bgroup
1231Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1232section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1233object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1234@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1235only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1236
252b5132
RH
1237@kindex -Bstatic
1238@kindex -dn
1239@kindex -non_shared
1240@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1241@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1242@itemx -dn
1243@itemx -non_shared
1244@itemx -static
1245Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1246platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1247variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1248may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1249library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1250option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1251option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1252shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1253references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1254libraries.
252b5132
RH
1255
1256@kindex -Bsymbolic
1257@item -Bsymbolic
1258When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1259definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1260for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1261within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1262platforms which support shared libraries.
1263
40b36307
L
1264@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1265@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1266When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1267symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1268This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1269libraries.
1270
55255dae
L
1271@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1272@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1273Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1274typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1275global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1276within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1277to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1278in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1279which support shared libraries.
1280
1281The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1282scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1283
40b36307
L
1284@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1285@item --dynamic-list-data
1286Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1287
1288@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1289@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1290Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1291is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1292
0b8a70d9
L
1293@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1294@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1295Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1296
252b5132
RH
1297@kindex --check-sections
1298@kindex --no-check-sections
1299@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1300@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1301Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1302been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1303perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1304suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1305allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1306restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1307Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1308force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1309option.
252b5132 1310
ddbb8a31
NC
1311@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1312@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1313@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1314@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1315This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1316by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1317command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1318output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1319input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1320specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1321follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1322behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1323
1324This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1325libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1326mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1327their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1328required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1329the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1330dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1331symbols.
1332
252b5132
RH
1333@cindex cross reference table
1334@kindex --cref
1335@item --cref
1336Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1337generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1338Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1339
1340The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1341easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1342sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1343symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1344definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1345where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1346symbol are listed.
252b5132 1347
4818e05f
AM
1348@cindex common allocation
1349@kindex --no-define-common
1350@item --no-define-common
1351This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1352The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1353@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1354
1355The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1356the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1357of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1358forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1359Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1360from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1361This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1362and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1363duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1364paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1365
252b5132 1366@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1367@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1368@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1369Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1370address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1371times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1372limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1373context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1374symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1375constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1376using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1377@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1378equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1379
1380@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1381@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1382@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1383@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1384@itemx --no-demangle
1385These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1386and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1387present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1388underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1389mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1390different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1391to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1392demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1393is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1394
1395@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1396@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1397@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1398@item -I@var{file}
1399@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1400Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1401generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1402linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1403doing.
1404
7ce691ae 1405@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1406@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1407@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1408@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1409Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1410with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1411
252b5132
RH
1412@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1413@item --force-exe-suffix
1414Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1415
1416If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1417@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1418the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1419option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1420Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1421it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1422
1423@kindex --gc-sections
1424@kindex --no-gc-sections
1425@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1426@item --gc-sections
1427@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1428Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1429targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1430performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1431@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1432
d5465ba2
AM
1433@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1434examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1435symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1436command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1437referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1438libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1439referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1440the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1441relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1442
ac69cbc6 1443This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1444@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1445specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1446a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1447
c17d87de
NC
1448@kindex --print-gc-sections
1449@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1450@cindex garbage collection
1451@item --print-gc-sections
1452@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1453List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1454printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1455collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1456default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1457be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1458line.
1459
30824704
RM
1460@kindex --print-output-format
1461@cindex output format
1462@item --print-output-format
1463Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1464other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1465in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1466
252b5132
RH
1467@cindex help
1468@cindex usage
1469@kindex --help
1470@item --help
1471Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1472
ea20a7da
CC
1473@kindex --target-help
1474@item --target-help
1475Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1476
2509a395
SL
1477@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1478@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1479Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1480@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1481
1482@cindex memory usage
1483@kindex --no-keep-memory
1484@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1485@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1486symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1487instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1488necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1489while linking a large executable.
1490
1491@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1492@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1493@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1494@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1495Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1496is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1497The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1498behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1499libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1500
aa713662
L
1501@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1502@kindex -z muldefs
1503@item --allow-multiple-definition
1504@itemx -z muldefs
1505Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1506report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1507first definition will be used.
1508
b79e8c78 1509@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1510@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1511@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1512@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1513Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1514This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1515determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1516shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1517how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1518
903249d7
NC
1519The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1520referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1521an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1522a shared library.
1523
1524The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1525libraries specified at link time are that:
1526
1527@itemize @bullet
1528@item
1529A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1530that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1531resolvable at load time.
1532@item
1533There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1534symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1535
1536The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1537select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1538architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1539appropriate memset function.
1540@end itemize
b79e8c78 1541
31941635
L
1542@kindex --no-undefined-version
1543@item --no-undefined-version
1544Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1545it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1546will be issued instead.
1547
3e3b46e5
PB
1548@kindex --default-symver
1549@item --default-symver
1550Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1551exported symbols.
1552
1553@kindex --default-imported-symver
1554@item --default-imported-symver
1555Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1556imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1557
252b5132
RH
1558@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1559@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1560Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1561files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1562been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1563This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1564errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1565have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1566inappropriate.
1567
fe7929ce
AM
1568@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1569@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1570Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1571library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1572
252b5132
RH
1573@kindex --no-whole-archive
1574@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1575Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1576archive files.
1577
1578@cindex output file after errors
1579@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1580@item --noinhibit-exec
1581Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1582Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1583errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1584when it issues any error whatsoever.
1585
0a9c1c8e
CD
1586@kindex -nostdlib
1587@item -nostdlib
1588Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1589command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1590(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1591
252b5132 1592@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1593@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1594@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1595@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1596file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1597@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1598object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1599object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1600should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1601usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1602name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1603list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1604command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1605this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1606@end ifclear
1607
36af4a4e
JJ
1608@kindex -pie
1609@kindex --pic-executable
1610@item -pie
1611@itemx --pic-executable
1612@cindex position independent executables
1613Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1614ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1615libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1616address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1617normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1618defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1619
252b5132
RH
1620@kindex -qmagic
1621@item -qmagic
1622This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1623
1624@kindex -Qy
1625@item -Qy
1626This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1627
1628@kindex --relax
1629@cindex synthesizing linker
1630@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1631@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1632@item --relax
28d5f677 1633@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1634An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1635@ifset GENERIC
1636This option is only supported on a few targets.
1637@end ifset
1638@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1639@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1640@end ifset
1641@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1642@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1643@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1644@ifset XTENSA
1645@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1646@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1647@ifset M68HC11
1648@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1649@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1650@ifset NIOSII
1651@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1652@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1653@ifset POWERPC
1654@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1655@end ifset
252b5132 1656
28d5f677
NC
1657On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1658global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1659addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1660synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1661instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1662
1663On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1664debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1665@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1666This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1667family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1668@end ifset
1669
1670@ifset GENERIC
1671On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1672but ignored.
1673@end ifset
1674
28d5f677
NC
1675On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1676@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1677
252b5132
RH
1678@cindex retaining specified symbols
1679@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1680@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1681@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1682@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1683Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1684discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1685symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1686@ifset GENERIC
1687(such as VxWorks)
1688@end ifset
1689where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1690run-time memory.
1691
1692@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1693or symbols needed for relocations.
1694
1695You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1696line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1697
1698@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1699@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1700@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1701@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1702Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1703linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1704arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1705them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1706also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1707objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1708@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1709ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1710@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1711
ff5dcc92 1712The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1713SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1714@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1715runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1716options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1717gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1718file systems.
252b5132 1719
ff5dcc92 1720For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1721followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1722the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1723@end ifset
1724
1725@ifset GENERIC
1726@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1727@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1728@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1729When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1730happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1731of the input files.
1732
1733When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1734non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1735shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1736explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1737specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1738@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1739either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1740appearing multiple times.
1741
28c309a2
NC
1742This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1743that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1744is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1745runtime linker would do.
1746
252b5132 1747The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1748libraries:
252b5132
RH
1749@enumerate
1750@item
ff5dcc92 1751Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1752@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1753Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1754between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1755specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1756used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1757at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1758by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1759the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1760@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1761On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1762@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1763environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1764@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1765On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1766directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1767@item
a1b8d843 1768For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1769variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1770@item
ec4eb78a
L
1771For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1772@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1773libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1774@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1775@item
252b5132
RH
1776The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1777@item
1778For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1779exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1780@end enumerate
1781
1782If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1783warning and continue with the link.
1784@end ifset
1785
1786@kindex -shared
1787@kindex -Bshareable
1788@item -shared
1789@itemx -Bshareable
1790@cindex shared libraries
1791Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1792and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1793shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1794undefined symbols in the link.
1795
252b5132 1796@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1797@item --sort-common
1798@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1799@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1800This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1801ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1802sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1803eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1804between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1805specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1806
2509a395
SL
1807@kindex --sort-section=name
1808@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1809This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1810patterns in the linker script.
1811
2509a395
SL
1812@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1813@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1814This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1815patterns in the linker script.
1816
252b5132 1817@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1818@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1819Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1820each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1821size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1822
1823@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1824@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1825Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1826output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1827This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1828certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1829cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1830that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1831support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1832input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1833more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1834many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1835
1836@kindex --stats
1837@item --stats
1838Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1839as execution time and memory usage.
1840
2509a395 1841@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1842@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1843Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1844configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1845that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1846
252b5132
RH
1847@kindex --traditional-format
1848@cindex traditional format
1849@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1850For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1851the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1852use the traditional format instead.
1853
1854@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1855For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1856symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1857full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1858@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1859trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1860combine duplicate entries.
1861
2509a395
SL
1862@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1863@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1864Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1865address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1866times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1867line.
1868@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1869for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1870@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1871should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1872sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1873
2509a395
SL
1874@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1875@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1876@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1877@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1878@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1879@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1880@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1881Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1882@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1883
2509a395
SL
1884@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1885@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 1886@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
1887When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1888byte of the text segment.
258795f5 1889
9d5777a3
RM
1890@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1891@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1892@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1893When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1894the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1895text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1896
0d705e9f
AM
1897@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1898@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1899@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1900When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1901model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1902
560e09e9
NC
1903@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1904@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1905Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1906values for @samp{method}:
1907
1908@table @samp
1909@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1910Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1911
1912@item report-all
da8bce14 1913Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1914
1915@item ignore-in-object-files
1916Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1917ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1918
1919@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1920Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1921ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1922when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1923libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1924command line.
1925@end table
1926
1927The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1928by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1929
1930Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1931unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1932can change this to a warning.
1933
1715a13c
L
1934@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1935@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1936@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1937@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1938Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1939supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1940the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1941argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1942
1943@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1944@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1945@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1946Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1947used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1948about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1949is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1950see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1951use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1952symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1953@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1954
7ce691ae 1955@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1956@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1957@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1958@item --warn-common
1959Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 1960a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
1961but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1962you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 1963Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1964warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1965
1966There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1967
1968@table @samp
1969@item int i = 1;
1970A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1971file.
1972
1973@item extern int i;
1974An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1975There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1976variable somewhere.
1977
1978@item int i;
1979A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1980variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1981The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1982single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1983size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1984a definition of the same variable.
1985@end table
1986
1987The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1988Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1989just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1990encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1991a common symbol.
1992
1993@enumerate
1994@item
1995Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1996definition for the symbol.
1997@smallexample
1998@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1999 overridden by definition
2000@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2001@end smallexample
2002
2003@item
2004Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2005the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2006except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2007@smallexample
2008@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2009 overriding common
2010@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2011@end smallexample
2012
2013@item
2014Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2015@smallexample
2016@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2017 of `@var{symbol}'
2018@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2019@end smallexample
2020
2021@item
2022Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2023@smallexample
2024@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2025 overridden by larger common
2026@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2027@end smallexample
2028
2029@item
2030Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2031the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2032encountered in a different order.
2033@smallexample
2034@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2035 overriding smaller common
2036@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2037@end smallexample
2038@end enumerate
2039
2040@kindex --warn-constructors
2041@item --warn-constructors
2042Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2043object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2044detect the use of global constructors.
2045
2046@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2047@item --warn-multiple-gp
2048Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2049This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2050Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2051section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2052of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2053base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2054base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2055bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2056large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2057values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2058option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2059
2060@kindex --warn-once
2061@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2062@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2063@item --warn-once
2064Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2065which refers to it.
2066
2067@kindex --warn-section-align
2068@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2069@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2070@item --warn-section-align
2071Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2072alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2073The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2074is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2075the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2076
8fdd7217
NC
2077@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2078@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2079Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2080
a0c402a5
L
2081@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2082@item --warn-alternate-em
2083Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2084
560e09e9
NC
2085@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2086@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2087If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2088@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2089This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2090
2091@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2092@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2093This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2094it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2095
252b5132
RH
2096@kindex --whole-archive
2097@cindex including an entire archive
2098@item --whole-archive
2099For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2100@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2101in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2102files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2103library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2104library. This option may be used more than once.
2105
7ec229ce 2106Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2107about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2108Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2109list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2110your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2111
2509a395
SL
2112@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2113@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2114Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2115@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2116undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2117@var{symbol}.
2118
2119This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2120wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2121wishes to call the system function, it should call
2122@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2123
2124Here is a trivial example:
2125
2126@smallexample
2127void *
cc2f008e 2128__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2129@{
cc2f008e 2130 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2131 return __real_malloc (c);
2132@}
2133@end smallexample
2134
ff5dcc92 2135If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2136all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2137instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2138call the real @code{malloc} function.
2139
2140You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2141links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2142you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2143file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2144call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2145
6aa29e7b
JJ
2146@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2147@item --eh-frame-hdr
2148Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2149@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2150
e41b3a13
JJ
2151@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2152@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2153Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2154generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2155if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2156
6c1439be
L
2157@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2158@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2159@item --enable-new-dtags
2160@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2161This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2162systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2163@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2164and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2165If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2166created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2167those options are only available for ELF systems.
2168
2d643429 2169@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2170@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2171Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2172close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2173time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2174increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2175value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2176
fdc90cb4
JJ
2177@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2178@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2179Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2180@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2181new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2182the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2183hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2184
35835446
JR
2185@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2186@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2187This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2188linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2189for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2190about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2191
4f9c04f7 2192Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21931021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2194run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2195has been used.
2196
2197The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2198enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2199
c0065db7
RM
2200@kindex --build-id
2201@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2202@item --build-id
2203@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c
JT
2204Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2205or a @code{.build-id} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2206unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2207@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2208@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2209@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2210the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2211string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2212@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2213is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2214
2215The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2216that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2217unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2218to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2219file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2220string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2221
2222Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2223@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2224@end table
2225
0285c67d
NC
2226@c man end
2227
36f63dca 2228@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2229
0285c67d
NC
2230@c man begin OPTIONS
2231
ff5dcc92 2232The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2233the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2234normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2235use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2236@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2237like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2238symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2239object file).
2240
2241In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2242support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2243PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2244values by either a space or an equals sign.
2245
ff5dcc92 2246@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2247
2248@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2249@item --add-stdcall-alias
2250If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2251as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2252[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2253
2254@kindex --base-file
2255@item --base-file @var{file}
2256Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2257addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2258@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2259[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2260
2261@kindex --dll
2262@item --dll
2263Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2264@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2265file.
bb10df36 2266[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2267
88183869
DK
2268@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2269@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2270@item --enable-long-section-names
2271@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2272The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2273the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2274for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2275fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2276to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2277allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2278disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2279generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2280as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2281with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2282GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2283information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2284option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2285section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2286when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2287image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2288[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2289
252b5132
RH
2290@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2291@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2292@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2293@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2294If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2295do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2296only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2297resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2298undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2299@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2300to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2301warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2302import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2303to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2304feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2305@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2306mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2307[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2308
522f09cd
KT
2309@kindex --leading-underscore
2310@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2311@item --leading-underscore
2312@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2313For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2314in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2315disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2316
252b5132
RH
2317@cindex DLLs, creating
2318@kindex --export-all-symbols
2319@item --export-all-symbols
2320If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2321be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2322otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2323explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2324attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2325option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2326@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2327@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2328exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2329re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2330such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2331@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2332@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2333Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2334not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2335extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2336(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2337These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2338@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2339@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2340@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2341@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2342[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2343
2344@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2345@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2346Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2347exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2348[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2349
2927aaca
NC
2350@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2351@item --exclude-all-symbols
2352Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2353[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2354
252b5132
RH
2355@kindex --file-alignment
2356@item --file-alignment
2357Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2358file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2359512.
bb10df36 2360[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2361
2362@cindex heap size
2363@kindex --heap
2364@item --heap @var{reserve}
2365@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2366Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2367to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2368committed.
bb10df36 2369[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2370
2371@cindex image base
2372@kindex --image-base
2373@item --image-base @var{value}
2374Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2375the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2376is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2377your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2378other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2379for dlls.
bb10df36 2380[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2381
2382@kindex --kill-at
2383@item --kill-at
2384If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2385symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2386[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2387
26d2d8a2
BF
2388@kindex --large-address-aware
2389@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2390If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2391header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2392greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2393or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2394section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2395[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2396
f69a2f97
NC
2397@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2398@item --disable-large-address-aware
2399Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2400This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2401driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2402addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2403[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2404
252b5132
RH
2405@kindex --major-image-version
2406@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2407Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2408[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2409
2410@kindex --major-os-version
2411@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2412Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2413[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2414
2415@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2416@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2417Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2418[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2419
2420@kindex --minor-image-version
2421@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2422Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2423[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2424
2425@kindex --minor-os-version
2426@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2427Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2428[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2429
2430@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2431@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2432Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2433[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2434
2435@cindex DEF files, creating
2436@cindex DLLs, creating
2437@kindex --output-def
2438@item --output-def @var{file}
2439The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2440file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2441(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2442library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2443automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2444[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2445
b044cda1
CW
2446@cindex DLLs, creating
2447@kindex --out-implib
2448@item --out-implib @var{file}
2449The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2450import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2451import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2452may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2453makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2454creation step.
bb10df36 2455[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2456
2457@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2458@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2459@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2460Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2461@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2462By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2463for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2464execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2465[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2466
2467@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2468@item --disable-auto-image-base
2469Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2470user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2471default.
bb10df36 2472[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2473
2474@cindex DLLs, linking to
2475@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2476@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2477When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2478search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2479@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2480between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2481uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2482@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2483[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2484
2485@kindex --enable-auto-import
2486@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2487Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2488DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2489building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2490'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2491to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2492specification published by Microsoft.
2493
e2a83dd0
NC
2494Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2495data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2496placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2497around a problem with consts that is described here:
2498http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2499
4d8907ac
DS
2500Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2501see this message:
0d888aac 2502
ece2d90e 2503"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2504documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2505
ece2d90e
NC
2506This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2507ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2508allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2509fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2510constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2511multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2512this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2513of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2514the warning, and exit.
2515
2516There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2517data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2518
2fa9fc65
NC
2519One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2520of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2521this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2522
c0065db7
RM
2523A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2524that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2525there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2526a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2527
2528@example
2529extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2530extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2531 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2532@end example
2533
2534or
2535
2536@example
2537extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2538extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2539 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2540@end example
2541
c0065db7 2542For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2543is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2544
2545@example
2546extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2547extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2548 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2549@end example
2550
c406afaf
NC
2551or
2552
2553@example
2554extern long long extern_ll;
2555extern_ll -->
2556 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2557@end example
2558
2fa9fc65 2559A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2560'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2561@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2562requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2563building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2564merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2565between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2566constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2567
2568Original:
2569@example
2570--foo.h
2571extern int arr[];
2572--foo.c
2573#include "foo.h"
2574void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2575 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2576@}
2577@end example
2578
2579Solution 1:
2580@example
2581--foo.h
2582extern int arr[];
2583--foo.c
2584#include "foo.h"
2585void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2586 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2587 volatile int *parr = arr;
2588 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2589@}
2590@end example
2591
2592Solution 2:
2593@example
2594--foo.h
2595/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2596#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2597 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2598#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2599#else
2600#define FOO_IMPORT
2601#endif
2602extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2603--foo.c
2604#include "foo.h"
2605void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2606 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2607@}
2608@end example
2609
c0065db7 2610A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2611library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2612for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2613functions).
bb10df36 2614[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2615
2616@kindex --disable-auto-import
2617@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2618Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2619@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2620[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2621
2fa9fc65
NC
2622@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2623@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2624If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2625that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2626a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2627environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2628[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2629
2630@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2631@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2632Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2633DLLs.
bb10df36 2634[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2635
b044cda1
CW
2636@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2637@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2638Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2639[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2640
252b5132
RH
2641@kindex --section-alignment
2642@item --section-alignment
2643Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2644addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2645[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2646
2647@cindex stack size
2648@kindex --stack
2649@item --stack @var{reserve}
2650@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2651Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2652to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2653committed.
bb10df36 2654[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2655
2656@kindex --subsystem
2657@item --subsystem @var{which}
2658@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2659@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2660Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2661legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2662@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2663the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2664@var{which}.
bb10df36 2665[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2666
2f563b51
DK
2667The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2668of the PE file header:
2669[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2670
2d5c3743
NC
2671@kindex --high-entropy-va
2672@item --high-entropy-va
2673Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2674(ASLR).
2675
2f563b51
DK
2676@kindex --dynamicbase
2677@item --dynamicbase
2678The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2679randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2680Vista for i386 PE targets.
2681
2682@kindex --forceinteg
2683@item --forceinteg
2684Code integrity checks are enforced.
2685
2686@kindex --nxcompat
2687@item --nxcompat
2688The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2689This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2690
2691@kindex --no-isolation
2692@item --no-isolation
2693Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2694
2695@kindex --no-seh
2696@item --no-seh
2697The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2698this image.
2699
2700@kindex --no-bind
2701@item --no-bind
2702Do not bind this image.
2703
2704@kindex --wdmdriver
2705@item --wdmdriver
2706The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2707
2f563b51
DK
2708@kindex --tsaware
2709@item --tsaware
2710The image is Terminal Server aware.
2711
0cb112f7
CF
2712@kindex --insert-timestamp
2713@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2714@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2715Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2716as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2717other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2718will result in slightly different images being produced each tiem the
2719same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2720can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2721that binaries produced from indentical sources will compare
2722identically.
252b5132
RH
2723@end table
2724
0285c67d
NC
2725@c man end
2726
ac145307
BS
2727@ifset C6X
2728@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2729
2730@c man begin OPTIONS
2731
2732The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2733libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2734all executables use an index of 0.
2735
2736@table @gcctabopt
2737
2738@kindex --dsbt-size
2739@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2740This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2741or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2742entries.
2743
2744@kindex --dsbt-index
2745@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2746This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2747to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2748executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2749@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2750
fbd9ad90
PB
2751@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2752The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2753exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2754
ac145307
BS
2755@end table
2756
2757@c man end
2758@end ifset
2759
93fd0973
SC
2760@ifset M68HC11
2761@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2762
2763@c man begin OPTIONS
2764
2765The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2766memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2767
2768@table @gcctabopt
2769
2770@kindex --no-trampoline
2771@item --no-trampoline
2772This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2773is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2774instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2775
2776@kindex --bank-window
2777@item --bank-window @var{name}
2778This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2779the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2780The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2781paging and addresses within the memory window.
2782
2783@end table
2784
2785@c man end
2786@end ifset
2787
7fb9f789
NC
2788@ifset M68K
2789@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2790
2791@c man begin OPTIONS
2792
2793The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2794when linking for 68K targets.
2795
2796@table @gcctabopt
2797
2798@kindex --got
2799@item --got=@var{type}
2800This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2801@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2802@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2803Info entry for @file{ld}.
2804
2805@end table
2806
2807@c man end
2808@end ifset
2809
833794fc
MR
2810@ifset MIPS
2811@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2812
2813@c man begin OPTIONS
2814
2815The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2816generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2817
2818@table @gcctabopt
2819
2820@kindex --insn32
2821@item --insn32
2822@kindex --no-insn32
2823@itemx --no-insn32
2824These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2825generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2826or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
282732-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2828used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2829possible.
2830
2831@end table
2832
2833@c man end
2834@end ifset
2835
252b5132
RH
2836@ifset UsesEnvVars
2837@node Environment
2838@section Environment Variables
2839
0285c67d
NC
2840@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2841
560e09e9 2842You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2843@ifclear SingleFormat
2844@code{GNUTARGET},
2845@end ifclear
2846@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2847
36f63dca 2848@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2849@kindex GNUTARGET
2850@cindex default input format
2851@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2852use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2853of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2854@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2855of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2856attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2857this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2858there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2859object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2860BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2861in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2862@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2863
2864@kindex LDEMULATION
2865@cindex default emulation
2866@cindex emulation, default
2867@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2868@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2869behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2870available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2871the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2872variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2873linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2874
2875@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2876@cindex demangling, default
2877Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2878@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2879default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2880a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2881may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2882options.
2883
0285c67d
NC
2884@c man end
2885@end ifset
2886
252b5132
RH
2887@node Scripts
2888@chapter Linker Scripts
2889
2890@cindex scripts
2891@cindex linker scripts
2892@cindex command files
2893Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2894written in the linker command language.
2895
2896The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2897the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2898the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2899more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2900direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2901described below.
2902
2903The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2904yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2905linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2906to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2907such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2908
2909You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2910line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2911default linker script.
2912
2913You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2914to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2915Linker Scripts}.
2916
2917@menu
2918* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2919* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2920* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2921* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2922* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2923* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2924* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2925* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2926* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2927* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2928* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2929@end menu
2930
2931@node Basic Script Concepts
2932@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2933@cindex linker script concepts
2934We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2935describe the linker script language.
2936
2937The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2938file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2939@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2940The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2941purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2942among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2943section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2944in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2945
2946Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2947also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 2948contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
2949the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2950A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2951area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2952loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2953which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2954of debugging information.
2955
2956Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2957first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2958the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2959@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2960section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2961same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2962is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2963(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2964based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2965RAM address would be the VMA.
2966
2967You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2968program with the @samp{-h} option.
2969
2970Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2971@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2972has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2973information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2974will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2975static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2976referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2977
2978You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2979program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2980option.
2981
2982@node Script Format
2983@section Linker Script Format
2984@cindex linker script format
2985Linker scripts are text files.
2986
2987You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2988either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2989symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2990generally ignored.
2991
2992Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2993If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2994otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2995double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2996file name.
2997
2998You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2999@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3000to whitespace.
3001
3002@node Simple Example
3003@section Simple Linker Script Example
3004@cindex linker script example
3005@cindex example of linker script
3006Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3007
3008The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3009@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3010memory layout of the output file.
3011
3012The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3013describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3014code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3015@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3016Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3017your input files.
3018
3019For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
30200x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3021linker script which will do that:
3022@smallexample
3023SECTIONS
3024@{
3025 . = 0x10000;
3026 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3027 . = 0x8000000;
3028 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3029 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3030@}
3031@end smallexample
3032
3033You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3034followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3035descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3036
252b5132
RH
3037The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3038sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3039counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3040other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3041current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3042incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3043@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3044
3045The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3046required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3047after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3048which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3049wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3050means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3051
3052Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3053@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3054@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3055
3056The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3057the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3058at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3059output section, the value of the location counter will be
3060@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3061effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3062immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3063
3064The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3065alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3066example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3067sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3068may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3069sections.
3070
3071That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3072
3073@node Simple Commands
3074@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3075@cindex linker script simple commands
3076In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3077
3078@menu
3079* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3080* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3081@ifclear SingleFormat
3082* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3083@end ifclear
3084
4a93e180 3085* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3086* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3087@end menu
3088
3089@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3090@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3091@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3092@cindex start of execution
3093@cindex first instruction
3094@cindex entry point
3095The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3096point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3097entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3098@smallexample
3099ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3100@end smallexample
3101
3102There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3103entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3104stopping when one of them succeeds:
3105@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3106@item
252b5132 3107the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3108@item
252b5132 3109the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3110@item
3ab904c4
NC
3111the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3112targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3113check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3114@item
252b5132 3115the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3116@item
252b5132
RH
3117The address @code{0}.
3118@end itemize
3119
3120@node File Commands
36f63dca 3121@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3122@cindex linker script file commands
3123Several linker script commands deal with files.
3124
3125@table @code
3126@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3127@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3128@cindex including a linker script
3129Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3130be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3131with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
313210 levels deep.
3133
4006703d
NS
3134You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3135@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3136
252b5132
RH
3137@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3138@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3139@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3140@cindex input files in linker scripts
3141@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3142@cindex linker script input object files
3143The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3144in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3145
3146For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3147a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3148then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3149
3150In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3151script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3152
e3f2db7f
AO
3153In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3154with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3155located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3156for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3157open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3158linker will search through the archive library search path.
3159The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3160as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3161description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3162
ff5dcc92 3163If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3164name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3165@samp{-l}.
3166
3167When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3168files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3169script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3170
3171@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3172@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3173@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3174@cindex grouping input files
3175The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3176files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3177new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3178in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3179
b717d30e
JJ
3180@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3181@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3182@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3183This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3184commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3185as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3186with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3187when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3188@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3189and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3190setting afterwards.
3191
252b5132
RH
3192@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3193@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3194@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3195The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3196@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3197@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3198Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3199precedence.
3200
3201You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3202output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3203
3204@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3205@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3206@cindex library search path in linker script
3207@cindex archive search path in linker script
3208@cindex search path in linker script
3209The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3210@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3211@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3212on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3213are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3214the command line option are searched first.
3215
3216@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3217@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3218@cindex first input file
3219The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3220that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3221though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3222when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3223first file.
3224@end table
3225
3226@ifclear SingleFormat
3227@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3228@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3229A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3230
3231@table @code
3232@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3233@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3234@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3235@cindex output file format in linker script
3236The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3237output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3238exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3239(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3240line option takes precedence.
3241
3242You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3243formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3244This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3245desired endianness.
3246
3247If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3248will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3249output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3250used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3251
3252For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3253command:
3254@smallexample
3255OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3256@end smallexample
3257This says that the default format for the output file is
3258@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3259option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3260format.
3261
3262@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3263@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3264@cindex input file format in linker script
3265The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3266files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3267This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3268(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3269is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3270command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3271@end table
3272@end ifclear
3273
4a93e180
NC
3274@node REGION_ALIAS
3275@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3276@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3277@cindex region alias
3278@cindex region names
3279
3280Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3281@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3282
3283@smallexample
3284REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3285@end smallexample
3286
3287The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3288memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3289to memory regions. An example follows.
3290
3291Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3292memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3293that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3294non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3295access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3296read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3297sections:
3298
3299@itemize @bullet
3300@item
3301@code{.text} program code;
3302@item
3303@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3304@item
3305@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3306@item
3307@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3308@end itemize
3309
3310The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3311part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3312output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3313systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3314@code{C}:
3315@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3316@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3317@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3318@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3319@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3320@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3321@end multitable
3322The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3323loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3324the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3325the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3326
3327The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3328includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3329memory layout:
3330@smallexample
3331INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3332
3333SECTIONS
3334 @{
3335 .text :
3336 @{
3337 *(.text)
3338 @} > REGION_TEXT
3339 .rodata :
3340 @{
3341 *(.rodata)
3342 rodata_end = .;
3343 @} > REGION_RODATA
3344 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3345 @{
3346 data_start = .;
3347 *(.data)
3348 @} > REGION_DATA
3349 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3350 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3351 .bss :
3352 @{
3353 *(.bss)
3354 @} > REGION_BSS
3355 @}
3356@end smallexample
3357
3358Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3359regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3360variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3361@table @code
3362@item A
3363Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3364@smallexample
3365MEMORY
3366 @{
3367 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3368 @}
3369
3370REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3371REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3372REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3373REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3374@end smallexample
3375@item B
3376Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3377into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3378@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3379@smallexample
3380MEMORY
3381 @{
3382 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3383 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3384 @}
3385
3386REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3387REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3388REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3389REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3390@end smallexample
3391@item C
3392Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3393@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3394initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3395system start into the @code{RAM}.
3396@smallexample
3397MEMORY
3398 @{
3399 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3400 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3401 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3402 @}
3403
3404REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3405REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3406REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3407REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3408@end smallexample
3409@end table
3410
3411It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3412@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3413necessary:
3414@smallexample
3415#include <string.h>
3416
3417extern char data_start [];
3418extern char data_size [];
3419extern char data_load_start [];
3420
3421void copy_data(void)
3422@{
3423 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3424 @{
3425 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3426 @}
3427@}
3428@end smallexample
3429
252b5132 3430@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3431@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3432There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3433
3434@table @code
3435@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3436@kindex ASSERT
3437@cindex assertion in linker script
3438Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3439with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3440
3441@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3442@kindex EXTERN
3443@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3444Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3445symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3446modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3447each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3448command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3449
3450@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3451@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3452@cindex common allocation in linker script
3453This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3454to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3455output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3456
4818e05f
AM
3457@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3458@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3459@cindex common allocation in linker script
3460This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3461command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3462to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3463
53d25da6
AM
3464@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3465@kindex INSERT
3466@cindex insert user script into default script
3467This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3468augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3469inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3470@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3471default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3472sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3473linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3474insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3475linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3476default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3477of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3478to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3479is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3480
3481@smallexample
3482SECTIONS
3483@{
3484 OVERLAY :
3485 @{
3486 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3487 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3488 @}
3489@}
3490INSERT AFTER .text;
3491@end smallexample
3492
252b5132
RH
3493@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3494@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3495@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3496This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3497references among certain output sections.
3498
3499In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3500using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3501will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3502errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3503a function defined in the other section.
3504
3505The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3506@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3507an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3508@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3509names.
3510
3511@ifclear SingleFormat
3512@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3513@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3514@cindex machine architecture
3515@cindex architecture
3516Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3517of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3518architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3519the @samp{-f} option.
3520@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3521
3522@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3523@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3524This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3525@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3526in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3527@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3528@end table
3529
3530@node Assignments
3531@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3532@cindex assignment in scripts
3533@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3534@cindex variables, defining
3535You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3536the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3537
3538@menu
3539* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3540* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3541* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3542* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3543* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3544@end menu
3545
3546@node Simple Assignments
3547@subsection Simple Assignments
3548
3549You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3550
3551@table @code
3552@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3553@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3554@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3555@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3556@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3557@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3558@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3559@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3560@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3561@end table
3562
3563The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3564@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3565defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3566
3567The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3568may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3569
3570The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3571
3572Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3573
3574You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3575statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3576section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3577
3578The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3579expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3580
3581Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3582assignments may be used:
3583
3584@smallexample
3585floating_point = 0;
3586SECTIONS
3587@{
3588 .text :
3589 @{
3590 *(.text)
3591 _etext = .;
3592 @}
156e34dd 3593 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3594 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3595@}
3596@end smallexample
3597@noindent
3598In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3599zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3600the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3601defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3602upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3603
eb8476a6
MR
3604@node HIDDEN
3605@subsection HIDDEN
3606@cindex HIDDEN
3607For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3608exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3609
3610Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3611@code{HIDDEN}:
3612
3613@smallexample
3614HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3615SECTIONS
3616@{
3617 .text :
3618 @{
3619 *(.text)
3620 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3621 @}
3622 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3623 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3624@}
3625@end smallexample
3626@noindent
3627In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3628
252b5132
RH
3629@node PROVIDE
3630@subsection PROVIDE
3631@cindex PROVIDE
3632In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3633only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3634the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3635@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3636@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3637@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3638@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3639@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3640
3641Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3642@smallexample
3643SECTIONS
3644@{
3645 .text :
3646 @{
3647 *(.text)
3648 _etext = .;
3649 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3650 @}
3651@}
3652@end smallexample
3653
3654In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3655underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3656the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3657underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3658If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3659linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3660
7af8e998
L
3661@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3662@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3663@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3664Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3665hidden and won't be exported.
3666
73ae6183
NC
3667@node Source Code Reference
3668@subsection Source Code Reference
3669
3670Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3671intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3672a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3673symbol that does not have a value.
3674
3675Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3676transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3677stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3678prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3679mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3680of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3681variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3682linker script variable might be referred to as:
3683
3684@smallexample
3685 extern int foo;
3686@end smallexample
3687
3688But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3689
3690@smallexample
3691 _foo = 1000;
3692@end smallexample
3693
3694In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3695transformation has taken place.
3696
3697When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3698things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3699in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3700second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3701table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3702contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3703value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3704
3705@smallexample
3706 int foo = 1000;
3707@end smallexample
3708
10bf6894 3709creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3710holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3711number 1000 is initially stored.
3712
3713When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3714first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3715memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3716So:
3717
3718@smallexample
3719 foo = 1;
3720@end smallexample
3721
3722looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3723associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3724address. Whereas:
3725
3726@smallexample
3727 int * a = & foo;
3728@end smallexample
3729
10bf6894 3730looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3731and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3732the variable @samp{a}.
3733
3734Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3735the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3736an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3737
3738@smallexample
3739 foo = 1000;
3740@end smallexample
3741
3742creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3743the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3744address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3745linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3746access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3747
3748Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3749you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3750use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3751section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3752linker script contains these declarations:
3753
3754@smallexample
3755@group
3756 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3757 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3758 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3759@end group
3760@end smallexample
3761
3762Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3763
3764@smallexample
3765@group
3766 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3767
73ae6183
NC
3768 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3769@end group
3770@end smallexample
3771
3772Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3773
252b5132 3774@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3775@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3776@kindex SECTIONS
3777The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3778into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3779
3780The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3781@smallexample
3782SECTIONS
3783@{
3784 @var{sections-command}
3785 @var{sections-command}
3786 @dots{}
3787@}
3788@end smallexample
3789
3790Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3791
3792@itemize @bullet
3793@item
3794an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3795@item
3796a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3797@item
3798an output section description
3799@item
3800an overlay description
3801@end itemize
3802
3803The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3804@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3805those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3806understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3807the layout of the output file.
3808
3809Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3810below.
3811
3812If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3813linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3814section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3815input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3816example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3817in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3818
3819@menu
3820* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3821* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3822* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3823* Input Section:: Input section description
3824* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3825* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3826* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3827* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3828* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3829@end menu
3830
3831@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3832@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3833The full description of an output section looks like this:
3834@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3835@group
7e7d5768 3836@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 3837 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 3838 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
3839 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3840 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3841 @{
3842 @var{output-section-command}
3843 @var{output-section-command}
3844 @dots{}
abc9061b 3845 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
3846@end group
3847@end smallexample
3848
3849Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3850
3851The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3852name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
3853The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3854the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
3855The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3856
3857Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3858
3859@itemize @bullet
3860@item
3861a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3862@item
3863an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3864@item
3865data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3866@item
3867a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3868@end itemize
3869
3870@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3871@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3872@cindex name, section
3873@cindex section name
3874The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3875meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3876support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3877must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3878example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3879output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3880names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3881quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3882characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3883commas must be quoted.
3884
3885The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3886Discarding}.
3887
3888@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3889@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3890@cindex address, section
3891@cindex section address
3892The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3893address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3894is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3895
3896If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3897section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3898to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3899alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3900contained within the output section.
3901
3902The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3903
3904@itemize @bullet
3905@item
3906If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3907is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3908in that region.
3909
3910@item
3911If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3912regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3913section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3914be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3915
3916@item
3917If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3918the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3919counter.
3920@end itemize
3921
3922@noindent
3923For example:
3924
252b5132
RH
3925@smallexample
3926.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3927@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3928
252b5132
RH
3929@noindent
3930and
ea5cae92 3931
252b5132
RH
3932@smallexample
3933.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3934@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3935
252b5132
RH
3936@noindent
3937are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3938@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3939counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3940counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3941input sections.
252b5132
RH
3942
3943The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3944For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3945so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3946do something like this:
3947@smallexample
3948.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3949@end smallexample
3950@noindent
3951This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3952aligned upward to the specified value.
3953
3954Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3955location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3956sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3957
3958@node Input Section
36f63dca 3959@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3960@cindex input sections
3961@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3962The most common output section command is an input section description.
3963
3964The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3965You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3966in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3967map the input files into your memory layout.
3968
3969@menu
3970* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3971* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3972* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3973* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3974* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3975@end menu
3976
3977@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3978@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3979@cindex input section basics
3980An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3981by a list of section names in parentheses.
3982
3983The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3984describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3985
3986The most common input section description is to include all input
3987sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3988include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3989@smallexample
3990*(.text)
3991@end smallexample
3992@noindent
18625d54
CM
3993Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3994of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3995match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3996example:
252b5132 3997@smallexample
b4346c09 3998*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3999@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
4000will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4001@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
4002
4003There are two ways to include more than one section:
4004@smallexample
4005*(.text .rdata)
4006*(.text) *(.rdata)
4007@end smallexample
4008@noindent
4009The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4010@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4011first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4012they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4013@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4014@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4015
4016You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4017You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4018needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4019@smallexample
4020data.o(.data)
4021@end smallexample
4022
ae17ab41
CM
4023To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4024of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4025
4026Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4027
4028@smallexample
4029@group
4030SECTIONS @{
4031 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4032 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4033@}
4034@end group
4035@end smallexample
4036
4037In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4038input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4039@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4040@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4041whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4042
967928e9
AM
4043You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4044matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4045with no whitespace around the colon.
4046
4047@table @samp
4048@item archive:file
4049matches file within archive
4050@item archive:
4051matches the whole archive
4052@item :file
4053matches file but not one in an archive
4054@end table
4055
4056Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4057wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4058single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4059@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4060within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4061also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4062other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4063from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4064command.
4065
252b5132
RH
4066If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4067the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4068commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4069@smallexample
4070data.o
4071@end smallexample
4072
967928e9
AM
4073When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4074and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4075characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4076name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4077did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4078though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4079@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4080the archive search path.
4081
4082@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4083@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4084@cindex input section wildcards
4085@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4086@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4087@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4088In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4089name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4090
4091The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4092pattern for the file name.
4093
4094The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4095
4096@table @samp
4097@item *
4098matches any number of characters
4099@item ?
4100matches any single character
4101@item [@var{chars}]
4102matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4103character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4104@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4105@item \
4106quotes the following character
4107@end table
4108
4109When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4110will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4111Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4112exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4113@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4114a @samp{/} character.
4115
4116File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4117specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4118does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4119
4120If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4121appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4122will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4123sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4124@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4125@smallexample
4126.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4127.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4128@end smallexample
4129
bcaa7b3e 4130@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4131Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4132in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4133this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4134pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4135@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4136into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4137
bcaa7b3e
L
4138@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4139@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4140difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4141descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4142Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4143reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4144
02ecc8e9
L
4145@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4146@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4147difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4148ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4149encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4150
bcaa7b3e
L
4151@cindex SORT
4152@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4153
4154When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4155can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4156
4157@enumerate
4158@item
4159@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4160It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4161sections have the same name.
4162@item
4163@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4164It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4165sections have the same alignment.
4166@item
c0065db7 4167@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4168treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4169@item
4170@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4171is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4172@item
4173All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4174@end enumerate
4175
4176When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4177section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4178takes precedence over the command line option.
4179
4180If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4181command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4182treated as nested sorting command.
4183
4184@enumerate
4185@item
4186@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4187@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4188@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4189@item
4190@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4191@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4192@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4193@end enumerate
4194
4195If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4196command line option will be ignored.
4197
eda680f8
L
4198@cindex SORT_NONE
4199@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4200section sorting option.
4201
252b5132
RH
4202If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4203@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4204precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4205
4206This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4207files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4208sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4209The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4210with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4211linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4212@smallexample
4213@group
4214SECTIONS @{
4215 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4216 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4217 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4218 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4219@}
4220@end group
4221@end smallexample
4222
4223@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4224@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4225@cindex common symbol placement
4226@cindex uninitialized data placement
4227A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4228file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4229linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4230named @samp{COMMON}.
4231
4232You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4233other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4234particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4235input files are placed in another section.
4236
4237In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4238@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4239@smallexample
4240.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4241@end smallexample
4242
4243@cindex scommon section
4244@cindex small common symbols
4245Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4246example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4247symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4248different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4249the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4250symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4251to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4252locations.
4253
4254@cindex [COMMON]
4255You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4256notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4257@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4258
4259@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4260@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4261@cindex KEEP
4262@cindex garbage collection
4263When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4264it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4265This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4266with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4267@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4268
4269@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4270@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4271The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4272to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4273start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4274@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4275follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4276@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4277@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4278All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4279files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4280
4281@smallexample
4282@group
4283SECTIONS @{
4284 outputa 0x10000 :
4285 @{
4286 all.o
4287 foo.o (.input1)
4288 @}
36f63dca
NC
4289@end group
4290@group
252b5132
RH
4291 outputb :
4292 @{
4293 foo.o (.input2)
4294 foo1.o (.input1)
4295 @}
36f63dca
NC
4296@end group
4297@group
252b5132
RH
4298 outputc :
4299 @{
4300 *(.input1)
4301 *(.input2)
4302 @}
4303@}
4304@end group
a1ab1d2a 4305@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4306
4307@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4308@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4309@cindex data
4310@cindex section data
4311@cindex output section data
4312@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4313@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4314@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4315@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4316@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4317You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4318@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4319an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4320parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4321value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4322counter.
4323
4324The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4325store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4326bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4327stored.
4328
4329For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4330of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4331@smallexample
4332BYTE(1)
4333LONG(addr)
4334@end smallexample
4335
4336When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4337same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4338target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4339@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4340@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4341
4342If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4343which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4344When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4345true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4346endianness of the first input object file.
4347
36f63dca 4348Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4349between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4350@smallexample
4351SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4352@end smallexample
4353whereas this will work:
4354@smallexample
4355SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4356@end smallexample
4357
252b5132
RH
4358@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4359@cindex holes, filling
4360@cindex unspecified memory
4361You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4362current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4363otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4364gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4365with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4366necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4367point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4368than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4369different parts of an output section.
4370
4371This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4372value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4373@smallexample
563e308f 4374FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4375@end smallexample
4376
4377The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4378section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4379part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4380entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4381precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4382expression.
252b5132
RH
4383
4384@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4385@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4386There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4387commands.
4388
4389@table @code
4390@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4391@cindex input filename symbols
4392@cindex filename symbols
4393@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4394The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4395The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4396file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4397the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4398
4399This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4400normally used for any other object file format.
4401
4402@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4403@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4404@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4405@item CONSTRUCTORS
4406When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4407unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4408destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4409arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4410automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4411For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4412linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4413@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4414ignored for other object file formats.
4415
4416The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4417constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4418Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4419the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4420first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4421of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4422compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4423formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4424@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4425the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4426destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4427@code{exit}.
4428
4429For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4430arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4431addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4432and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4433linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4434runtime code expects to see.
4435
4436@smallexample
4437 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4438 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4439 *(.ctors)
4440 LONG(0)
4441 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4442 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4443 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4444 *(.dtors)
4445 LONG(0)
4446 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4447@end smallexample
4448
4449If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4450which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4451are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4452are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4453command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4454@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4455@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4456@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4457
4458Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4459and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4460need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4461scripts.
4462
4463@end table
4464
4465@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4466@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4467@cindex discarding sections
4468@cindex sections, discarding
4469@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4470The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4471This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4472may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4473@smallexample
49c13adb 4474.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4475@end smallexample
4476@noindent
4477will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4478@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4479sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4480space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4481too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4482space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4483@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4484@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4485This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4486
a0976ea4 4487The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4488on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4489symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4490the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4491section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4492
4493@cindex /DISCARD/
4494The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4495input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4496section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4497
4498@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4499@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4500@cindex output section attributes
4501We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4502like this:
0c71d759 4503
252b5132 4504@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4505@group
7e7d5768 4506@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4507 [AT(@var{lma})]
4508 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4509 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4510 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4511 @{
4512 @var{output-section-command}
4513 @var{output-section-command}
4514 @dots{}
562d3460 4515 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4516@end group
4517@end smallexample
0c71d759 4518
252b5132
RH
4519We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4520@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4521remaining section attributes.
4522
a1ab1d2a 4523@menu
252b5132
RH
4524* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4525* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4526* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4527* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4528* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4529* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4530* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4531* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4532@end menu
4533
4534@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4535@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4536Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4537parentheses. The following types are defined:
4538
4539@table @code
4540@item NOLOAD
4541The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4542loaded into memory when the program is run.
4543@item DSECT
4544@itemx COPY
4545@itemx INFO
4546@itemx OVERLAY
4547These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4548rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4549marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4550section when the program is run.
4551@end table
4552
4553@kindex NOLOAD
4554@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4555@cindex loading, preventing
4556The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4557the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4558the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4559@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4560need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4561@smallexample
4562@group
4563SECTIONS @{
4564 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4565 @dots{}
4566@}
4567@end group
4568@end smallexample
4569
4570@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4571@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4572@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4573@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4574@cindex load address
4575@cindex section load address
4576Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4577@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4578@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4579specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4580address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4581
ea5cae92
NC
4582The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4583specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4584takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4585load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4586region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4587
4588If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4589section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4590load address:
4591
4592@itemize @bullet
4593@item
4594If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4595the LMA address as well.
4596
4597@item
4598If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4599
4600@item
4601Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4602with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4603section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4604VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4605the last section in the located region.
4606
4607@item
4608If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4609that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4610
4611@item
4612If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4613section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4614@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4615
4616@cindex ROM initialized data
4617@cindex initialized data in ROM
4618This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4619example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4620called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4621@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4622even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4623uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4624defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4625counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4626
4627@smallexample
4628@group
4629SECTIONS
4630 @{
4631 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4632 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4633 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4634 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4635 .bss 0x3000 :
4636 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4637@}
4638@end group
4639@end smallexample
4640
4641The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4642this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4643the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4644how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4645script.
4646
4647@smallexample
4648@group
4649extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4650char *src = &_etext;
4651char *dst = &_data;
4652
ea5cae92
NC
4653/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4654while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4655 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4656
ea5cae92 4657/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4658for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4659 *dst = 0;
4660@end group
4661@end smallexample
4662
bbf115d3
L
4663@node Forced Output Alignment
4664@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4665@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4666@cindex forcing output section alignment
4667@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4668You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4669alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4670intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4671
7e7d5768
AM
4672@node Forced Input Alignment
4673@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4674@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4675@cindex forcing input section alignment
4676@cindex input section alignment
4677You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4678SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4679sections, whether larger or smaller.
4680
0c71d759
NC
4681@node Output Section Constraint
4682@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4683@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4684@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4685@cindex constraints on output sections
4686You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4687of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4688read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4689@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4690
252b5132 4691@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4692@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4693@kindex >@var{region}
4694@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4695@cindex memory regions and sections
4696You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4697using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4698
4699Here is a simple example:
4700@smallexample
4701@group
4702MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4703SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4704@end group
4705@end smallexample
4706
4707@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4708@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4709@kindex :@var{phdr}
4710@cindex section, assigning to program header
4711@cindex program headers and sections
4712You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4713using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4714one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4715assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4716@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4717linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4718
4719Here is a simple example:
4720@smallexample
4721@group
4722PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4723SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4724@end group
4725@end smallexample
4726
4727@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4728@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4729@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4730@cindex section fill pattern
4731@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4732You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4733@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4734(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4735within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4736alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4737necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4738of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4739an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4740fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4741other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4742pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4743expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4744
4745You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4746output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4747
4748Here is a simple example:
4749@smallexample
4750@group
563e308f 4751SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4752@end group
4753@end smallexample
4754
4755@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4756@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4757@kindex OVERLAY
4758@cindex overlays
4759An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4760are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4761the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4762copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4763required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4764can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4765than another.
4766
4767Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4768@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4769output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4770command is as follows:
4771@smallexample
4772@group
4773OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4774 @{
4775 @var{secname1}
4776 @{
4777 @var{output-section-command}
4778 @var{output-section-command}
4779 @dots{}
4780 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4781 @var{secname2}
4782 @{
4783 @var{output-section-command}
4784 @var{output-section-command}
4785 @dots{}
4786 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4787 @dots{}
abc9061b 4788 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4789@end group
4790@end smallexample
4791
4792Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4793section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4794section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4795those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4796except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4797sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4798
abc9061b
CC
4799The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4800the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4801
252b5132
RH
4802The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4803addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4804memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4805whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4806and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4807and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4808
56dd11f0
NC
4809If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4810references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4811the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4812sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4813@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4814
4815For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4816provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4817defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4818@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4819the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4820within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4821symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4822
4823At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4824the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4825
4826Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4827@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4828@smallexample
4829@group
4830 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4831 @{
4832 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4833 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4834 @}
4835@end group
4836@end smallexample
4837@noindent
4838This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4839address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4840@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4841following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4842@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4843@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4844
4845C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4846like the following.
4847
4848@smallexample
4849@group
4850 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4851 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4852 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4853@end group
4854@end smallexample
4855
4856Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4857everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4858example could have been written identically as follows.
4859
4860@smallexample
4861@group
4862 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4863 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4864 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4865 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4866 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4867 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4868 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4869@end group
4870@end smallexample
4871
4872@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4873@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4874@kindex MEMORY
4875@cindex memory regions
4876@cindex regions of memory
4877@cindex allocating memory
4878@cindex discontinuous memory
4879The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4880memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4881
4882The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4883memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4884may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4885can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4886set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4887regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4888around to fit into the available regions.
4889
4890A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4891command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4892you wish. The syntax is:
4893@smallexample
4894@group
a1ab1d2a 4895MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4896 @{
4897 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4898 @dots{}
4899 @}
4900@end group
4901@end smallexample
4902
4903The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4904region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4905Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4906with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4907must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4908add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 4909command.
252b5132
RH
4910
4911@cindex memory region attributes
4912The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4913whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4914not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4915@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4916section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4917the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4918them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4919
4920The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4921@table @samp
4922@item R
4923Read-only section
4924@item W
4925Read/write section
4926@item X
4927Executable section
4928@item A
4929Allocatable section
4930@item I
4931Initialized section
4932@item L
4933Same as @samp{I}
4934@item !
c09e9a8c 4935Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4936@end table
4937
4938If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4939@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4940attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4941in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4942attributes.
4943
4944@kindex ORIGIN =
4945@kindex o =
4946@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4947The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4948the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4949cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4950abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4951@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4952
4953@kindex LENGTH =
4954@kindex len =
4955@kindex l =
4956The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4957region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4958be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4959@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4960
4961In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4962available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4963and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4964linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4965is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4966or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4967explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4968region.
4969
4970@smallexample
4971@group
a1ab1d2a 4972MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4973 @{
4974 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4975 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4976 @}
4977@end group
4978@end smallexample
4979
4980Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4981specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4982@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4983a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4984output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4985was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4986the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4987output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4988region, the linker will issue an error message.
4989
3ec57632 4990It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4991expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4992@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4993
4994@smallexample
4995@group
c0065db7 4996 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4997@end group
4998@end smallexample
4999
252b5132
RH
5000@node PHDRS
5001@section PHDRS Command
5002@kindex PHDRS
5003@cindex program headers
5004@cindex ELF program headers
5005@cindex program segments
5006@cindex segments, ELF
5007The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5008@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5009loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5010program with the @samp{-p} option.
5011
5012When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5013reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5014program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5015This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5016interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5017
5018The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5019in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5020precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5021the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5022not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5023
5024The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5025generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5026ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5027
5028This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5029@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5030
5031@smallexample
5032@group
5033PHDRS
5034@{
5035 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5036 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5037@}
5038@end group
5039@end smallexample
5040
5041The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5042of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5043header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5044with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5045must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5046is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5047
5048Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5049system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5050specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5051sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5052attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5053Section Phdr}.
5054
5055It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5056merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5057repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5058contain the section.
5059
5060If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5061then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5062not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5063convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5064placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5065default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5066segment at all.
5067
5068@kindex FILEHDR
5069@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5070You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5071the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5072The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5073file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5074include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5075segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5076these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5077
5078The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5079value of the keyword.
5080
5081@table @asis
5082@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5083Indicates an unused program header.
5084
5085@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5086Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5087the file.
5088
5089@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5090Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5091
5092@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5093Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5094found.
5095
5096@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5097Indicates a segment holding note information.
5098
5099@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5100A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5101ABI.
5102
5103@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5104Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5105
5106@item @var{expression}
5107An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5108be used for types not defined above.
5109@end table
5110
5111You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5112in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5113@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5114Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5115output section attribute.
5116
5117The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5118which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5119explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5120an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5121header.
5122
5123Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5124headers used on a native ELF system.
5125
5126@example
5127@group
5128PHDRS
5129@{
5130 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5131 interp PT_INTERP ;
5132 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5133 data PT_LOAD ;
5134 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5135@}
5136
5137SECTIONS
5138@{
5139 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5140 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5141 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5142 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5143 @dots{}
5144 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5145 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5146 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5147 @dots{}
5148@}
5149@end group
5150@end example
5151
5152@node VERSION
5153@section VERSION Command
5154@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5155@cindex symbol versions
5156@cindex version script
5157@cindex versions of symbols
5158The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5159only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5160symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5161a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5162shared library.
5163
5164You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5165you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5166also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5167
5168The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5169@smallexample
5170VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5171@end smallexample
5172
5173The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5174Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5175version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5176version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5177version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5178scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5179library.
5180
5181The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5182examples.
5183
5184@smallexample
5185VERS_1.1 @{
5186 global:
5187 foo1;
5188 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5189 old*;
5190 original*;
5191 new*;
252b5132
RH
5192@};
5193
5194VERS_1.2 @{
5195 foo2;
5196@} VERS_1.1;
5197
5198VERS_2.0 @{
5199 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5200 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5201 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5202 "f(int, double)";
5203 @};
252b5132
RH
5204@} VERS_1.2;
5205@end smallexample
5206
5207This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5208version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5209The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5210a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5211of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5212symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5213is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5214in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5215However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5216name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5217
5218Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5219depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5220to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5221
5222Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5223depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5224and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5225
5226When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5227specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5228unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5229unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5230somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5231wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5232wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5233set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5234ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5235
5236The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5237they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5238could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5239However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5240
0f6bf451 5241Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5242in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5243symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5244won't.
5245
5246@smallexample
7c9c73be 5247@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5248@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5249
252b5132
RH
5250When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5251symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5252requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5253shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5254loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5255linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5256application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5257way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5258all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5259search for each symbol reference.
5260
5261The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5262doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5263that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5264functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5265the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5266required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5267that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5268versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5269the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5270
5271There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5272first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5273source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5274script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5275maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5276@smallexample
5277__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5278@end smallexample
5279@noindent
5280in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5281be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5282The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5283@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5284takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5285
5286The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5287function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5288an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5289version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5290linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5291
5292To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5293source file. Here is an example:
5294
5295@smallexample
5296__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5297__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5298__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5299__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5300@end smallexample
5301
5302In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5303unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5304example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5305@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5306
5307When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5308some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5309this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5310@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5311declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5312you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5313
5314If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5315within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5316(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5317specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5318
cb840a31
L
5319You can also specify the language in the version script:
5320
5321@smallexample
5322VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5323@end smallexample
5324
c0065db7 5325The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5326The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5327demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5328patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5329@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5330
86043bbb
MM
5331Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5332described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5333or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5334the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5335whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5336cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5337might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5338should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5339expect when you upgrade.
5340
252b5132
RH
5341@node Expressions
5342@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5343@cindex expressions
5344@cindex arithmetic
5345The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5346that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5347expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5348host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5349
5350You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5351
5352The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5353expressions.
5354
5355@menu
5356* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5357* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5358* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5359* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5360* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5361* Operators:: Operators
5362* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5363* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5364* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5365@end menu
5366
5367@node Constants
5368@subsection Constants
5369@cindex integer notation
5370@cindex constants in linker scripts
5371All constants are integers.
5372
5373As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5374octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5375hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5376@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5377@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5378value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5379
5380@cindex scaled integers
5381@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5382@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5383@cindex suffixes for integers
5384@cindex integer suffixes
5385In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5386constant by
5387@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5388@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5389@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5390@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5391@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5392@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5393@tex
5394${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5395@end tex
5396@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5397respectively. For example, the following
5398all refer to the same quantity:
5399
252b5132 5400@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5401_fourk_1 = 4K;
5402_fourk_2 = 4096;
5403_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5404_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5405@end smallexample
5406
8a308ae8
NC
5407Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5408conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5409
0c71d759
NC
5410@node Symbolic Constants
5411@subsection Symbolic Constants
5412@cindex symbolic constants
5413@kindex CONSTANT
5414It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5415the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5416
5417@table @code
5418@item MAXPAGESIZE
5419@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5420The target's maximum page size.
5421
5422@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5423@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5424The target's default page size.
5425@end table
5426
5427So for example:
5428
5429@smallexample
9d5777a3 5430 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5431@end smallexample
5432
5433will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5434supported by the target.
5435
252b5132
RH
5436@node Symbols
5437@subsection Symbol Names
5438@cindex symbol names
5439@cindex names
5440@cindex quoted symbol names
5441@kindex "
5442Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5443and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5444Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5445specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5446keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5447@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5448"SECTION" = 9;
5449"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5450@end smallexample
5451
5452Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5453to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5454whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5455
ecca9871
L
5456@node Orphan Sections
5457@subsection Orphan Sections
5458@cindex orphan
5459Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5460are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5461script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5462output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5463placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5464attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5465same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5466If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5467at the end of the file.
5468
5469For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5470well as section flag.
5471
41911f68 5472If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5473the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5474__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5475section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5476orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5477representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5478character.
5479
252b5132
RH
5480@node Location Counter
5481@subsection The Location Counter
5482@kindex .
5483@cindex dot
5484@cindex location counter
5485@cindex current output location
5486The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5487current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5488location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5489within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5490anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5491
5492@cindex holes
5493Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5494moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5495location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5496and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5497doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5498
5499@smallexample
5500SECTIONS
5501@{
5502 output :
5503 @{
5504 file1(.text)
5505 . = . + 1000;
5506 file2(.text)
5507 . += 1000;
5508 file3(.text)
563e308f 5509 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5510@}
5511@end smallexample
5512@noindent
5513In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5514located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5515followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5516@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5517@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5518specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5519
5c6bbab8
NC
5520@cindex dot inside sections
5521Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5522current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5523statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5524absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5525however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5526not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5527
5528@smallexample
5529SECTIONS
5530@{
5531 . = 0x100
5532 .text: @{
5533 *(.text)
5534 . = 0x200
5535 @}
5536 . = 0x500
5537 .data: @{
5538 *(.data)
5539 . += 0x600
5540 @}
5541@}
5542@end smallexample
5543
5544The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5545and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5546the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5547much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5548move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5549and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5550the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5551the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5552
b5666f2f
AM
5553@cindex dot outside sections
5554Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5555output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5556needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5557
5558@smallexample
5559SECTIONS
5560@{
5561 start_of_text = . ;
5562 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5563 end_of_text = . ;
5564
5565 start_of_data = . ;
5566 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5567 end_of_data = . ;
5568@}
5569@end smallexample
5570
5571If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5572not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5573between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5574should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5575blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5576the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5577sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5578statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5579special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5580place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5581as follows:
5582
5583@smallexample
5584SECTIONS
5585@{
5586 start_of_text = . ;
5587 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5588 end_of_text = . ;
5589
5590 start_of_data = . ;
5591 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5592 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5593 end_of_data = . ;
5594@}
5595@end smallexample
5596
5597This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5598@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5599placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5600assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5601a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5602section. So you could write:
5603
5604@smallexample
5605SECTIONS
5606@{
5607 start_of_text = . ;
5608 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5609 end_of_text = . ;
5610
5611 . = . ;
5612 start_of_data = . ;
5613 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5614 end_of_data = . ;
5615@}
5616@end smallexample
5617
5618Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5619@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5620
252b5132
RH
5621@need 2000
5622@node Operators
5623@subsection Operators
5624@cindex operators for arithmetic
5625@cindex arithmetic operators
5626@cindex precedence in expressions
5627The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5628the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5629@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5630@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5631@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5632@smallexample
5633precedence associativity Operators Notes
5634(highest)
56351 left ! - ~ (1)
56362 left * / %
56373 left + -
56384 left >> <<
56395 left == != > < <= >=
56406 left &
56417 left |
56428 left &&
56439 left ||
564410 right ? :
564511 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5646(lowest)
5647@end smallexample
5648Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5649(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5650(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5651@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5652@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5653@tex
5654\vskip \baselineskip
5655%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5656\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5657\hrule
5658\halign
5659{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5660height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5661&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5662height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5663\noalign{\hrule}
5664height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5665&highest&&&&&\cr
5666% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5667&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5668&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5669&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5670&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5671&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5672&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5673&7&&left&&|&\cr
5674&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5675&9&&left&&||&\cr
5676&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5677&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5678&lowest&&&&&\cr
5679height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5680\hrule}
5681@end tex
5682@iftex
5683{
5684@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5685@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5686@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5687}
5688@end iftex
5689@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5690
5691@node Evaluation
5692@subsection Evaluation
5693@cindex lazy evaluation
5694@cindex expression evaluation order
5695The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5696an expression when absolutely necessary.
5697
5698The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5699address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5700regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5701as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5702
5703However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5704until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5705other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5706for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5707
5708The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5709assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5710allocation.
5711
5712Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5713@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5714
5715If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5716available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5717following
5718@smallexample
5719@group
5720SECTIONS
5721 @{
a1ab1d2a 5722 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5723 @{ *(.text) @}
5724 @}
5725@end group
5726@end smallexample
5727@noindent
5728will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5729address}.
5730
5731@node Expression Section
5732@subsection The Section of an Expression
5733@cindex expression sections
5734@cindex absolute expressions
5735@cindex relative expressions
5736@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5737@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5738@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5739Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5740relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5741using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5742value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5743symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5744operations.
5745
abf4be64
AM
5746Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5747section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5748address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5749@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5750functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5751One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5752(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5753differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5754versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5755section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5756Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5757absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5758given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5759everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5760
5761In the following simple example,
252b5132 5762
7542af2a
AM
5763@smallexample
5764@group
5765SECTIONS
5766 @{
5767 . = 0x100;
5768 __executable_start = 0x100;
5769 .data :
5770 @{
5771 . = 0x10;
5772 __data_start = 0x10;
5773 *(.data)
5774 @}
5775 @dots{}
5776 @}
5777@end group
5778@end smallexample
252b5132 5779
7542af2a
AM
5780both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5781address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5782@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5783section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5784
5c3049d2
AM
5785For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5786addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5787
5788@itemize @bullet
5789@item
c05f749e
AM
5790Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5791operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5792absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5793@item
7542af2a
AM
5794Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5795relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5796and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5797@item
c05f749e
AM
5798Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5799in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5800address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5801before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5802@end itemize
5803
5804The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5805
5806@itemize @bullet
5807@item
5808An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5809@item
5810The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5811@item
9bc8bb33 5812The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5813relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5814(after above conversions) is also a number.
5815@item
5816The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5817relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5818section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5819@item
5820The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5821conversions) is an absolute address.
5822@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5823
5824You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5825to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5826create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5827section @samp{.data}:
5828@smallexample
5829SECTIONS
5830 @{
5831 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5832 @}
5833@end smallexample
5834@noindent
5835If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5836@samp{.data} section.
5837
7542af2a
AM
5838Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5839particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5840
252b5132
RH
5841@node Builtin Functions
5842@subsection Builtin Functions
5843@cindex functions in expressions
5844The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5845use in linker script expressions.
5846
5847@table @code
5848@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5849@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5850@cindex expression, absolute
5851Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5852of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5853value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5854normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5855
5856@item ADDR(@var{section})
5857@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5858@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5859Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5860script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5861the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5862@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5863@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5864the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5865@smallexample
5866@group
5867SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5868 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5869 @{
252b5132
RH
5870 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5871 @dots{}
5872 @}
5873 .output :
5874 @{
5875 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5876 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5877 @}
5878@dots{} @}
5879@end group
5880@end smallexample
5881
876f4090
NS
5882@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5883@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5884@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5885@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5886@cindex round up location counter
5887@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5888@cindex round up expression
5889@cindex align expression
5890Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5891to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5892doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5893arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5894expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5895equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5896
5897Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5898next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5899variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5900input sections:
252b5132
RH
5901@smallexample
5902@group
5903SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5904 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5905 *(.data)
5906 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5907 @}
5908@dots{} @}
5909@end group
5910@end smallexample
5911@noindent
5912The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5913a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5914a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5915of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5916
5917The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5918
362c1d1a
NS
5919@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5920@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5921@cindex section alignment
5922Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5923been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5924evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5925the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5926value in that section.
5927@smallexample
5928@group
5929SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5930 .output @{
5931 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5932 @dots{}
5933 @}
5934@dots{} @}
5935@end group
5936@end smallexample
5937
252b5132
RH
5938@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5939@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5940This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5941scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5942section.
5943
2d20f7bf
JJ
5944@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5945@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5946This is equivalent to either
5947@smallexample
5948(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5949@end smallexample
5950or
5951@smallexample
5952(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5953@end smallexample
5954@noindent
5955depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5956for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5957@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5958If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5959memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5960bytes in the on-disk file.
5961
5962This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5963any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5964@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5965be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5966working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5967
5968@noindent
5969Example:
5970@smallexample
5971 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5972@end smallexample
5973
5974@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5975@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5976This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5977evaluation purposes.
5978
5979@smallexample
5980 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5981@end smallexample
5982
a4f5ad88
JJ
5983@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5984@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5985This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 5986@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
5987When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5988does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5989@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5990boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5991it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
5992@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
5993padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
5994section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
5995
5996@smallexample
5997 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5998@end smallexample
5999
252b5132
RH
6000@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6001@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6002@cindex symbol defaults
6003Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6004defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6005return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6006default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6007shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6008the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6009existed, its value is preserved:
6010
6011@smallexample
6012@group
6013SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6014 .text : @{
6015 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6016 @dots{}
6017 @}
6018 @dots{}
6019@}
6020@end group
6021@end smallexample
6022
3ec57632
NC
6023@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6024@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6025Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6026
252b5132
RH
6027@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6028@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6029@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6030Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6031Section LMA}).
6032
2e53f7d6
NC
6033@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6034@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6035Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6036@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6037
252b5132
RH
6038@kindex MAX
6039@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6040Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6041
6042@kindex MIN
6043@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6044Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6045
6046@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6047@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6048@cindex unallocated address, next
6049Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6050This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6051use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6052output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6053
3ec57632
NC
6054@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6055@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6056Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6057
ba916c8a
MM
6058@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6059@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6060Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6061value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6062@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6063will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6064can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6065``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6066name.
6067
252b5132
RH
6068@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6069@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6070@cindex section size
6071Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6072been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6073evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6074@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6075@smallexample
6076@group
6077SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6078 .output @{
6079 .start = . ;
6080 @dots{}
6081 .end = . ;
6082 @}
6083 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6084 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6085@dots{} @}
6086@end group
6087@end smallexample
6088
6089@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6090@itemx sizeof_headers
6091@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6092@cindex header size
6093Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6094information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6095this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6096choose, to facilitate paging.
6097
6098@cindex not enough room for program headers
6099@cindex program headers, not enough room
6100When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6101@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6102number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6103addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6104additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6105room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6106the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6107script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6108you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6109command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6110@end table
6111
6112@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6113@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6114@cindex implicit linker scripts
6115If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6116an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6117linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6118linker will report an error.
6119
6120An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6121
6122Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6123assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6124commands.
6125
6126Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6127at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6128read. This can affect archive searching.
6129
6130@ifset GENERIC
6131@node Machine Dependent
6132@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6133
6134@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6135@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6136sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6137functionality are not listed.
6138
6139@menu
36f63dca
NC
6140@ifset H8300
6141* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6142@end ifset
6143@ifset I960
6144* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6146@ifset M68HC11
6147* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6148@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6149@ifset ARM
6150* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6151@end ifset
6152@ifset HPPA
6153* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6154@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6155@ifset M68K
6156* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6157@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6158@ifset MIPS
6159* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6160@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6161@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6162* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6163@end ifset
2469cfa2 6164@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6165* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6166@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6167@ifset NDS32
6168* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6169@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6170@ifset NIOSII
6171* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6172@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6173@ifset POWERPC
6174* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6175@end ifset
6176@ifset POWERPC64
6177* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6178@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6179@ifset SPU
6180* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6181@end ifset
74459f0e 6182@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6183* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6184@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6185@ifset WIN32
6186* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6187@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6188@ifset XTENSA
6189* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6190@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6191@end menu
6192@end ifset
6193
252b5132
RH
6194@ifset H8300
6195@ifclear GENERIC
6196@raisesections
6197@end ifclear
6198
6199@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6200@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6201
6202@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6203For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6204you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6205
6206@table @emph
6207@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6208@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6209@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6210targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6211program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6212respectively.
6213
6214@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6215@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6216@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6217@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6218sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6219page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6220(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6221@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6222top page of memory).
1502569c 6223
81f5558e
NC
6224@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6225indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6226displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6227the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6228@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6229whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6230range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6231
1502569c 6232@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6233@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6234biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6235which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6236page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6237(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6238@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6239the top page of memory).
6240
6241@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6242@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
624332 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6244changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6245(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6246@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6247the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6248@end table
6249
6250@ifclear GENERIC
6251@lowersections
6252@end ifclear
6253@end ifset
6254
36f63dca 6255@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6256@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6257@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6258@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6259@node Renesas
6260@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6261
c2dcd04e
NC
6262@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6263H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6264options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6265@end ifset
6266@end ifclear
6267
6268@ifset I960
6269@ifclear GENERIC
6270@raisesections
6271@end ifclear
6272
6273@node i960
6274@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6275
6276@cindex i960 support
6277
6278You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6279specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6280family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6281incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6282linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6283libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6284search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6285
6286For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6287well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6288paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6289the names
6290
6291@smallexample
6292@group
6293try
6294libtry.a
6295tryca
6296libtryca.a
6297@end group
6298@end smallexample
6299
6300@noindent
6301The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6302two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6303
6304You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6305the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6306use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6307specifies a library.
6308
6309@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6310@cindex relaxing on i960
6311@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6312you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6313@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6314them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6315instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6316instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6317target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6318not itself call any subroutines).
6319
6320@ifclear GENERIC
6321@lowersections
6322@end ifclear
6323@end ifset
6324
6325@ifset ARM
6326@ifclear GENERIC
6327@raisesections
6328@end ifclear
6329
93fd0973
SC
6330@ifset M68HC11
6331@ifclear GENERIC
6332@raisesections
6333@end ifclear
6334
6335@node M68HC11/68HC12
6336@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6337
6338@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6339
6340@subsection Linker Relaxation
6341
6342For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6343optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6344
6345@table @emph
6346@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6347@item relaxing address modes
6348@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6349targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6350program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6351respectively.
6352
6353@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6354transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6355page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6356
6357@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6358When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6359of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6360addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6361@code{bset} instructions.
6362
6363@end table
6364
6365@subsection Trampoline Generation
6366
6367@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6368@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6369For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6370call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6371will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6372trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6373case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6374point to the function trampoline.
6375
6376@ifclear GENERIC
6377@lowersections
6378@end ifclear
6379@end ifset
6380
36f63dca 6381@node ARM
3674e28a 6382@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6383
6384@cindex ARM interworking support
6385@kindex --support-old-code
6386For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6387between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6388been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6389line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6390libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6391option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6392given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6393which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6394the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6395non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6396
6397@cindex thumb entry point
6398@cindex entry point, thumb
6399@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6400The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6401@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6402But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6403branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6404executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6405
ce11ba6c
KT
6406@cindex PE import table prefixing
6407@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6408The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6409the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6410element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6411import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6412
e489d0ae
PB
6413@cindex BE8
6414@kindex --be8
6415The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6416executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6417The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6418
3674e28a
PB
6419@cindex TARGET1
6420@kindex --target1-rel
6421@kindex --target1-abs
6422The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6423@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6424or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6425and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6426
6427@cindex TARGET2
6428@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6429The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6430@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6431meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6432@table @samp
6433@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6434@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6435@item abs
6436@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6437@item got-rel
6438@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6439@end table
6440
319850b4
JB
6441@cindex FIX_V4BX
6442@kindex --fix-v4bx
6443The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6444specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6445interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6446also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6447
6448In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6449linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6450@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6451
6452In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6453relocations are ignored.
6454
845b51d6
PB
6455@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6456@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6457Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6458relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6459
6460@smallexample
6461TST rM, #1
6462MOVEQ PC, rM
6463BX Rn
6464@end smallexample
6465
6466This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6467and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6468condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6469
33bfe774
JB
6470@cindex USE_BLX
6471@kindex --use-blx
6472The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6473BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6474situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6475code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6476each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6477
6478This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6479specify it if you are using that target.
6480
c6dd86c6
JB
6481@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6482@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6483The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6484bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6485instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6486to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6487the support code can read the intended values.
6488
6489The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6490intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6491and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6492intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6493full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6494you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6495
6496If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6497enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6498@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6499mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6500vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6501@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6502
6503If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6504potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6505such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6506first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6507instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6508the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6509are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6510
2de70689
MGD
6511@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6512@kindex --fix-arm1176
6513@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6514The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6515in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6516are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6517unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6518
9d5777a3 6519Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6520Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6521http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6522
bf21ed78
MS
6523@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6524@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6525The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6526warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6527enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6528linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6529using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6530not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6531
6532@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6533@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6534The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6535warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6536@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6537linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6538using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6539
726150b7
NC
6540@cindex PIC_VENEER
6541@kindex --pic-veneer
6542The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6543ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6544is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6545@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6546
6547@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6548@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6549The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6550code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6551perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6552placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6553controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6554The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6555duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6556group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6557code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6558where they should be placed.
6559
6560The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6561@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6562placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6563branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6564placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6565value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6566exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6567A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6568linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6569from the input sections.
6570
6571The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6572@samp{N = +1}.
6573
1a51c1a4
NC
6574Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6575only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6576otherwise.
6577
1db37fe6
YG
6578@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6579@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6580@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6581The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6582
6583The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6584
68fcca92
JW
6585@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6586@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6587@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6588The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6589
6590Please contact ARM for further details.
6591
1db37fe6
YG
6592@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6593@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6594@cindex Merging exidx entries
6595The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6596
6597@kindex --long-plt
6598@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6599The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6600which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6601entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6602
36f63dca
NC
6603@ifclear GENERIC
6604@lowersections
6605@end ifclear
6606@end ifset
6607
6608@ifset HPPA
6609@ifclear GENERIC
6610@raisesections
6611@end ifclear
6612
6613@node HPPA ELF32
6614@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6615@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6616@kindex --multi-subspace
6617When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6618import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6619The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6620stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6621multiple sub-spaces.
6622
6623@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6624@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6625Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6626stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6627@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6628sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6629a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6630the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6631conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6632prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6633A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6634branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6635@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6636@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6637detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6638positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6639
6640Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6641single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6642create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6643large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6644
6645@ifclear GENERIC
6646@lowersections
6647@end ifclear
6648@end ifset
6649
7fb9f789
NC
6650@ifset M68K
6651@ifclear GENERIC
6652@raisesections
6653@end ifclear
6654
6655@node M68K
6656@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6657
6658@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6659@kindex --got=@var{type}
6660The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6661The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6662@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6663the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6664@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6665entries only at non-negative offsets.
6666@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6667entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6668support such GOTs.
6669@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6670output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6671file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6672files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6673
6674@ifclear GENERIC
6675@lowersections
6676@end ifclear
6677@end ifset
6678
833794fc
MR
6679@ifset MIPS
6680@ifclear GENERIC
6681@raisesections
6682@end ifclear
6683
6684@node MIPS
6685@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6686
6687@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6688@kindex --insn32
6689@kindex --no-insn32
6690The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6691microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6692in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6693used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6694or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6695including 16-bit ones where possible.
6696
6697@ifclear GENERIC
6698@lowersections
6699@end ifclear
6700@end ifset
6701
36f63dca
NC
6702@ifset MMIX
6703@ifclear GENERIC
6704@raisesections
6705@end ifclear
6706
6707@node MMIX
6708@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6709For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6710@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6711understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6712can translate between the two formats.
6713
6714There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6715Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6716registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6717equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6718@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6719global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6720this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6721symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6722
7a2de473
HPN
6723Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6724@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6725The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6726of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6727
6728Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6729are left out from an mmo file.
6730
6731@ifclear GENERIC
6732@lowersections
6733@end ifclear
6734@end ifset
6735
6736@ifset MSP430
6737@ifclear GENERIC
6738@raisesections
6739@end ifclear
6740
6741@node MSP430
6742@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6743For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6744will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6745just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6746
6747@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6748The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6749
6750@table @code
6751@item @samp{.vectors}
6752Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6753
6754@item @samp{.bootloader}
6755Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6756in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6757
6758@item @samp{.infomem}
6759Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6760this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6761
c0065db7 6762@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6763This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6764in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6765
6766@item @samp{.noinit}
6767Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6768
c0065db7 6769The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6770@end table
6771
6772@ifclear GENERIC
6773@lowersections
6774@end ifclear
6775@end ifset
6776
35c08157
KLC
6777@ifset NDS32
6778@ifclear GENERIC
6779@raisesections
6780@end ifclear
6781
6782@node NDS32
6783@section @code{ld} and NDS32
6784@kindex relaxing on NDS32
6785For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6786relaxes objects according to these options.
6787
6788@table @code
6789@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6790Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6791
6792@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6793Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6794
6795@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6796Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6797
6798@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6799Export the EX9 table after linking.
6800
6801@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6802Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6803
6804@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6805Update the existing EX9 table.
6806
6807@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6808Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6809
6810@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6811Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6812
6813@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6814Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6815
6816@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6817Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6818@end table
6819
6820@ifclear GENERIC
6821@lowersections
6822@end ifclear
6823@end ifset
6824
78058a5e
SL
6825@ifset NIOSII
6826@ifclear GENERIC
6827@raisesections
6828@end ifclear
6829
6830@node Nios II
6831@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6832@cindex Nios II call relaxation
6833@kindex --relax on Nios II
6834
6835Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6836transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6837which may result in @command{ld} giving
6838@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6839The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6840trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6841outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6842trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6843be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6844larger than 256MB.
6845
6846The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6847is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6848@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6849locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6850source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6851register as a temporary.
6852
6853Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6854relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6855option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6856
6857@ifclear GENERIC
6858@lowersections
6859@end ifclear
6860@end ifset
6861
2a60a7a8
AM
6862@ifset POWERPC
6863@ifclear GENERIC
6864@raisesections
6865@end ifclear
6866
6867@node PowerPC ELF32
6868@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6869@cindex PowerPC long branches
6870@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6871Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6872displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6873@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6874@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6875the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6876section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6877section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6878@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6879both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6880considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6881
6882@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6883@table @option
6884@cindex PowerPC PLT
6885@kindex --bss-plt
6886@item --bss-plt
6887Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6888generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6889the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6890writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6891@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6892PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6893compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6894BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6895
016687f8
AM
6896@kindex --secure-plt
6897@item --secure-plt
6898@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6899@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6900when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6901layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6902style BSS PLT.
6903
2a60a7a8
AM
6904@cindex PowerPC GOT
6905@kindex --sdata-got
6906@item --sdata-got
6907The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6908sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6909@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6910section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6911@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6912@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6913@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6914@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6915PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6916pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6917GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6918really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6919
6920@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6921@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6922@item --emit-stub-syms
6923This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6924symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6925
6926@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6927@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6928@item --no-tls-optimize
6929PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6930sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6931disable the optimization.
6932@end table
6933
6934@ifclear GENERIC
6935@lowersections
6936@end ifclear
6937@end ifset
6938
6939@ifset POWERPC64
6940@ifclear GENERIC
6941@raisesections
6942@end ifclear
6943
6944@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6945@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6946
6947@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6948@table @option
6949@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6950@kindex --stub-group-size
6951@item --stub-group-size
6952Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6953by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6954@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6955sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6956a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6957the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6958conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6959prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6960A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6961branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6962@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6963@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6964detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6965positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6966
6967Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6968single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6969create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6970large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6971
6972@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6973@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6974@item --emit-stub-syms
6975This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6976symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6977
6978@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6979@kindex --dotsyms
6980@kindex --no-dotsyms
6981@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6982These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6983in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6984function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6985code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6986properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6987to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6988@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6989dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6990feature.
6991
6992@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6993@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6994@item --no-tls-optimize
6995PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6996sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6997disable the optimization.
6998
6999@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7000@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7001@item --no-opd-optimize
7002PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7003corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7004the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7005Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7006
7007@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7008@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7009@item --non-overlapping-opd
7010Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7011@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7012the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7013entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7014
7015@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7016@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7017@item --no-toc-optimize
7018PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7019entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7020reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7021marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7022marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7023relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7024unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7025reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7026discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7027reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7028code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7029optimization.
7030
7031@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7032@kindex --no-multi-toc
7033@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7034If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7035@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7036where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7037entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7038total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7039grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7040TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7041calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7042help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
704364K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7044Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7045
7046@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7047@kindex --no-toc-sort
7048@item --no-toc-sort
7049By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7050happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7051placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7052with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7053referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7054@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7055results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7056off this feature.
7057
7058@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7059@kindex --plt-align
7060@kindex --no-plt-align
7061@item --plt-align
7062@itemx --no-plt-align
7063Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7064padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7065specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7066that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7067stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7068
7069@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7070@kindex --plt-static-chain
7071@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7072@item --plt-static-chain
7073@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7074Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7075chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7076chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7077
7078@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7079@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7080@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7081@item --plt-thread-safe
7082@itemx --no-thread-safe
7083With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7084lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7085another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7086order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7087memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7088barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7089looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7090seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7091default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7092@end table
7093
7094@ifclear GENERIC
7095@lowersections
7096@end ifclear
7097@end ifset
7098
49fa1e15
AM
7099@ifset SPU
7100@ifclear GENERIC
7101@raisesections
7102@end ifclear
7103
7104@node SPU ELF
7105@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7106
7107@cindex SPU ELF options
7108@table @option
7109
7110@cindex SPU plugins
7111@kindex --plugin
7112@item --plugin
7113This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7114
7115@cindex SPU overlays
7116@kindex --no-overlays
7117@item --no-overlays
7118Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7119regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7120@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7121turns off all this special overlay handling.
7122
7123@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7124@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7125@item --emit-stub-syms
7126This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7127symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7128
7129@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7130@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7131@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7132This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7133function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7134on calls to non-overlay regions.
7135
7136@cindex SPU local store size
7137@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7138@item --local-store=lo:hi
7139@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7140the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7141range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7142
c0065db7 7143@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7144@kindex --stack-analysis
7145@item --stack-analysis
7146SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7147unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7148under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7149@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7150@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7151determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7152for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7153for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7154for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7155find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7156and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7157under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7158dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7159is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7160and calls will be given.
7161
c0065db7 7162@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7163@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7164@item --emit-stack-syms
7165This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7166in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7167These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7168functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7169functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7170such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7171The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7172@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7173@end table
7174
7175@ifclear GENERIC
7176@lowersections
7177@end ifclear
7178@end ifset
7179
36f63dca
NC
7180@ifset TICOFF
7181@ifclear GENERIC
7182@raisesections
7183@end ifclear
7184
7185@node TI COFF
7186@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7187@cindex TI COFF versions
7188@kindex --format=@var{version}
7189The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7190TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7191also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7192format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7193header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7194
7195@ifclear GENERIC
7196@lowersections
7197@end ifclear
7198@end ifset
7199
2ca22b03
NC
7200@ifset WIN32
7201@ifclear GENERIC
7202@raisesections
7203@end ifclear
7204
7205@node WIN32
7206@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7207
c0065db7 7208This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7209See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7210command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7211
7212@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7213@cindex import libraries
7214@item import libraries
69da35b5 7215The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7216libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7217regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7218archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7219support for creating such libraries provided with the
7220@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7221
c0065db7
RM
7222@item exporting DLL symbols
7223@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7224The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7225
7226@table @emph
7227@item using auto-export functionality
7228@cindex using auto-export functionality
7229By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7230which is controlled by the following command line options:
7231
0a5d968e
NC
7232@itemize
7233@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7234@item --exclude-symbols
7235@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7236@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7237@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7238@end itemize
7239
09e2aba4
DK
7240When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7241(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7242symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7243often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7244private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7245options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7246exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7247final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7248
7249If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7250command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7251if either of the following are true:
7252
7253@itemize
7254@item A DEF file is used.
7255@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7256@end itemize
dc8465bf 7257
c0065db7
RM
7258@item using a DEF file
7259@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7260Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7261an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7262exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7263name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7264command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7265
7266@example
7267gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7268@end example
7269
0a5d968e
NC
7270Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7271@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7272
dc8465bf
NC
7273Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7274
7275@example
4b5bd4e7 7276LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7277
7278EXPORTS
7279foo
7280bar
7281_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7282another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7283var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7284doo = foo == foo2
7285eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7286@end example
dc8465bf 7287
7fcab871 7288This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7289symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7290alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7291by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7292@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7293@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7294export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7295in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7296symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7297
6b31ad16
DS
7298The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7299name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7300the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7301
b45619c0
NC
7302When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7303library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7304@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7305executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7306
7307With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7308specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7309non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7310
7311If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7312or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7313filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7314
4b5bd4e7
DS
7315The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7316
7317@example
7318EXPORTS
7319 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7320 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7321 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7322@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7323
7324Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7325@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7326@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7327@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7328Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7329@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7330string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7331
7332The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7333
7334@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7335will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7336by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7337linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7338library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7339
7340@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7341The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7342the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7343@code{*_imp__foo}).
7344
7345@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7346well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7347read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7348variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7349the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7350extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7351application will behave unexpectedly.
7352
7353@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7354it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7355symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7356API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7357the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7358
4b5bd4e7
DS
7359See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7360other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7361
7362@cindex creating a DEF file
7363While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7364with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7365
7366@item Using decorations
7367@cindex Using decorations
7368Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7369itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7370declared as:
7371
7372@example
7373__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7374__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7375@end example
7376
7377All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7378any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7379this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7380the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7381
7382Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7383decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7384instead:
7385
7386@example
7387__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7388__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7389@end example
7390
c0065db7
RM
7391This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7392when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7393variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7394code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7395of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7396omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7397@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7398information.
c0065db7 7399@end table
dc8465bf 7400
2ca22b03
NC
7401@cindex automatic data imports
7402@item automatic data imports
7403The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7404by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7405compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7406issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7407code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7408c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7409initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7410decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7411platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7412command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7413The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7414suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7415trigger the feature's use.
7416
c0065db7 7417auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7418additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7419
c0065db7 7420"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7421documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7422
c0065db7
RM
7423The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7424occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7425One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7426below.
7427
7428@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7429For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7430object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7431offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7432field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7433in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7434without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7435The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7436references.
7437
c0065db7
RM
7438The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7439be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7440themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7441runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7442compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7443support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7444run without error on an older system.
7445
c0065db7
RM
7446@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7447enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7448
7449@cindex direct linking to a dll
7450@item direct linking to a dll
7451The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7452including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7453libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7454traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7455libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7456function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7457though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7458storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7459tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7460large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7461
c0065db7 7462Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7463@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7464of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7465perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7466select the dll instead of an import library.
7467
2ca22b03 7468
69da35b5
NC
7469For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7470to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7471
7472@example
45e948fe
NC
7473libxxx.dll.a
7474xxx.dll.a
7475libxxx.a
7476xxx.lib
69da35b5 7477cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7478libxxx.dll
7479xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7480@end example
7481
69da35b5
NC
7482before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7483
c0065db7
RM
7484(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7485where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7486@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7487file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7488@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7489
c0065db7
RM
7490Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7491@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7492was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7493various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7494could coexist on the same machine.
7495
2ca22b03
NC
7496The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7497applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7498libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7499
7500@example
7501bin/
7502 cygxxx.dll
7503lib/
7504 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7505 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7506@end example
7507
c0065db7
RM
7508Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7509done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7510
75111. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7512@example
7513gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7514@end example
2ca22b03 7515
69da35b5
NC
7516However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7517(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7518@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7519not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7520
2ca22b03
NC
75212. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7522directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7523should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7524making the app/dll.
7525
7526@example
7527ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7528@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7529
7530Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7531
7532@example
7533gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7534@end example
69da35b5
NC
7535
7536This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7537perfectly legal
7538
7539@example
7540bin/
7541 cygxxx-5.dll
7542lib/
c0065db7 7543 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7544@end example
7545
dc8465bf 7546Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7547even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7548@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7549
7550Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7551wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7552
75531. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7554work with auto-imported data.
7555
dc8465bf
NC
75562. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7557import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7558symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7559for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7560possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7561
45e948fe
NC
75623. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7563critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7564in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7565stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7566
69da35b5 7567So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7568true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7569a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7570binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7571massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7572requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7573will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7574
c0065db7 7575@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7576@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7577@item adding additional names
7578Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7579A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7580exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7581when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7582import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7583
c0065db7 7584@example
dc8465bf
NC
7585LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7586
7587EXPORTS
c0065db7 7588foo
dc8465bf 7589_foo = foo
c0065db7 7590@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7591
7592The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7593
7594Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7595source code using the "weak" attribute:
7596
c0065db7
RM
7597@example
7598void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7599void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7600@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7601
7602See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7603symbols.
7604
7605@item renaming symbols
7606Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7607kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7608@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7609DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7610created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7611
c0065db7 7612@example
dc8465bf
NC
7613LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7614
7615EXPORTS
7616_foo = foo
c0065db7 7617@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7618
7619The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7620@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7621@end table
dc8465bf 7622
0a5d968e 7623Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7624unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7625If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7626@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7627that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7628@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7629renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7630to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7631the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7632In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7633which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7634
7635@cindex weak externals
7636@item weak externals
7637The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7638weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7639defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7640are three variants of weak externals:
7641@itemize
7642@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7643called lazy externals.
7644@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7645This form is not presently implemented.
7646@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7647implemented.
7648@end itemize
7649As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7650are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7651uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7652
7653@cindex aligned common symbols
7654@item aligned common symbols
7655As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7656desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7657the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7658carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7659by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7660tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7661but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7662warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 7663
2ca22b03
NC
7664@end table
7665
7666@ifclear GENERIC
7667@lowersections
7668@end ifclear
7669@end ifset
7670
e0001a05
NC
7671@ifset XTENSA
7672@ifclear GENERIC
7673@raisesections
7674@end ifclear
7675
7676@node Xtensa
7677@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7678
7679@cindex Xtensa processors
7680The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7681@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7682specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7683keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7684example, with the command:
7685
7686@smallexample
7687SECTIONS
7688@{
7689 .text : @{
7690 *(.literal .text)
7691 @}
7692@}
7693@end smallexample
7694
7695@noindent
7696@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7697and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7698literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7699interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7700group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7701files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7702and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7703
43cd72b9 7704@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7705@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7706Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7707provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7708is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7709literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7710will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7711location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7712the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7713unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7714@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7715range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7716
7717For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7718to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7719instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7720instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7721instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7722@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7723hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7724By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7725switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7726density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7727instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7728performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7729linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7730a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7731
7732The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7733control the linker:
7734
7735@cindex Xtensa options
7736@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7737@item --size-opt
7738When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7739more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7740no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7741alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7742preserve the correctness of the code.
7743@end table
e0001a05
NC
7744
7745@ifclear GENERIC
7746@lowersections
7747@end ifclear
7748@end ifset
7749
252b5132
RH
7750@ifclear SingleFormat
7751@node BFD
7752@chapter BFD
7753
7754@cindex back end
7755@cindex object file management
7756@cindex object formats available
7757@kindex objdump -i
7758The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7759These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7760object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7761format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7762it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7763associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7764object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7765(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7766list all the formats available for your configuration.
7767
7768@cindex BFD requirements
7769@cindex requirements for BFD
7770As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7771several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7772BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7773formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7774been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7775BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7776may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7777
7778One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7779mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7780useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7781conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7782
7783@menu
7784* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7785@end menu
7786
7787@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7788@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7789@cindex opening object files
7790@include bfdsumm.texi
7791@end ifclear
7792
7793@node Reporting Bugs
7794@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7795@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7796@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7797
ff5dcc92 7798Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7799
7800Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7801it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7802to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7803work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7804@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7805
7806In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7807information that enables us to fix the bug.
7808
7809@menu
7810* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7811* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7812@end menu
7813
7814@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7815@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7816@cindex bug criteria
7817
7818If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7819
7820@itemize @bullet
7821@cindex fatal signal
7822@cindex linker crash
7823@cindex crash of linker
7824@item
7825If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7826@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7827
7828@cindex error on valid input
7829@item
ff5dcc92 7830If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7831
7832@cindex invalid input
7833@item
ff5dcc92 7834If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7835may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7836object files are correct.
7837
7838@item
7839If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7840improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7841@end itemize
7842
7843@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7844@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7845@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7846@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7847
7848A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7849products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7850recommend you contact that organization first.
7851
7852You can find contact information for many support companies and
7853individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7854distribution.
7855
ad22bfe8 7856@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7857Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7858@value{BUGURL}.
7859@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7860
7861The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7862@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7863fact or leave it out, state it!
7864
7865Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7866problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7867assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7868matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7869the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7870location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7871were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7872into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7873specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7874and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7875
7876Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7877the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7878on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7879
7880Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7881bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7882respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7883You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7884
7885To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7886
7887@itemize @bullet
7888@item
ff5dcc92 7889The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7890the @samp{--version} argument.
7891
7892Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7893the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7894
7895@item
ff5dcc92 7896Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7897patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7898
7899@item
7900The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7901version number.
7902
7903@item
ff5dcc92 7904What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7905``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7906
7907@item
7908The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7909observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7910list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7911sufficient.
7912
7913If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7914and then we might not encounter the bug.
7915
7916@item
7917A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7918bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7919provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7920bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7921state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7922requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7923we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7924attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7925
7926If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7927@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7928object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7929@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7930how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7931
7932@item
7933A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7934incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7935
ff5dcc92 7936Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7937will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7938not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7939a chance to make a mistake.
7940
7941Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7942say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7943copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7944C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7945and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7946fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7947you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7948any conclusion from our observations.
7949
7950@item
ff5dcc92 7951If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7952diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7953@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7954If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7955context, not by line number.
7956
7957The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7958sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7959@end itemize
7960
7961Here are some things that are not necessary:
7962
7963@itemize @bullet
7964@item
7965A description of the envelope of the bug.
7966
7967Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7968which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7969changes will not affect it.
7970
7971This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7972will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7973with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7974We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7975
7976Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7977of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7978output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7979less time, and so on.
7980
7981However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7982report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7983
7984@item
7985A patch for the bug.
7986
7987A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7988the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7989a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7990to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7991
ff5dcc92 7992Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7993construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7994through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7995able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7996fixed.
7997
7998And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7999patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8000help us to understand.
8001
8002@item
8003A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8004
8005Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8006things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8007@end itemize
8008
8009@node MRI
8010@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8011@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8012To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8013linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8014alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8015described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8016simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8017@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8018linker commands; these commands are described here.
8019
8020In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8021file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8022features to make use of them.
8023
8024You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8025@samp{-c} command-line option.
8026
8027Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8028command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8029blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8030MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8031issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8032
8033Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8034
8035You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8036lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8037The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8038
8039@table @code
8040@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8041@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8042@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8043Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8044the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8045@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8046your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8047script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8048commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8049input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8050@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8051
8052@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8053@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8054Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8055in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8056
8057@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8058
8059@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8060@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8061Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8062@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8063
8064@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8065@item BASE @var{expression}
8066Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8067absolute addresses) in the output file.
8068
8069@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8070@item CHIP @var{expression}
8071@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8072This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8073
8074@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8075@item END
8076This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8077
8078@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8079@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8080Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8081language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8082
8083@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8084@item
252b5132
RH
8085S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8086
8087@item
8088IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8089
8090@item
8091COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8092@samp{COFF}
8093@end enumerate
8094
8095@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8096@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8097Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8098@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8099
8100The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8101same line, with no change in its effect.
8102
8103@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8104@item LOAD @var{filename}
8105@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8106Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8107same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8108command line.
8109
8110@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8111@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8112@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8113MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8114option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8115
8116@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8117@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8118@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8119Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8120order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8121script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8122sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8123file, in the order specified.
8124
8125@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8126@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8127@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8128@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8129Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8130@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8131
8132@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8133@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8134@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8135@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8136You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8137specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8138If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8139@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8140@end table
8141
793c5807
NC
8142@node GNU Free Documentation License
8143@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8144@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8145
370b66a1
CD
8146@node LD Index
8147@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8148
8149@printindex cp
8150
8151@tex
7ca01ed9 8152% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8153% meantime:
8154\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8155\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8156\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8157\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8158\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8159\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8160\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8161\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8162\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8163% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8164@end tex
8165
252b5132 8166@bye